Engine Control System: Section

B ENGINE
EC
SECTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
QR TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ........................................... 39 F
INDEX FOR DTC.........................................................9 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction.......................................39
Alphabetical Index.............................................................9 DTC Inspection Priority Chart.........................................42
DTC No. Index................................................................10 Fail-safe Chart ....................................................... 43 G
Basic Inspection...............................................................45
PRECAUTIONS.........................................................13
Symptom Matrix Chart....................................................50
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
"AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- SIONER"....13 Engine Control Component Parts Location ........... 54....
H
Circuit Diagram...............................................................59
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout.....................61
A/T...................................................................................13 ECM Terminals and Reference Value.............................61
Precaution........................................................................13 CONSULT-II Function ............................................ 68 I
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis........................16
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
PREPARATION.........................................................17
... 79
Special Service Tools......................................................17
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor J
Commercial Service Tools..............................................17 Mode................................................................................82
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...................................19 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.....84
System Diagram (Models with Three Way Catalyst.).........19
Description ............................................................. 84
System Diagram (Models without Three Way Cat- alyst) Testing Condition............................................................84 K
.........................................................................................20 Inspection Procedure.......................................................84
Vacuum Hose Drawing....................................................21 Diagnostic Procedure.......................................................85
System Chart....................................................................22 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENTINCI- L
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................22 DENT.........................................................................88
Electronic Ignition (EI) System.......................................25 Description.......................................................................88
Air Conditioning Cut Control..........................................25 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 88 M
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed). .26 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM.....................89
Can communication (A/T models)..................................26 Wiring Diagram...............................................................89
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE...............................27 ECM Terminals and Reference Value.............................90
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................27 Diagnostic Procedure.......................................................90
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning................28 Component Inspection.....................................................94
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning........................28 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE..............95
Idle Air Volume Learning...............................................28 Description.......................................................................95
Fuel Pressure Check........................................................31 On Board Diagnosis Logic..............................................95
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM.............33 DTC Confirmation Procedure..........................................95
Introduction.....................................................................33 Wiring Diagram...............................................................96
Two Trip Detection Logic...............................................33 Diagnostic Procedure.......................................................97
Emission-related Diagnostic Information........................33 DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER........................98
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System)...................................35 Description.......................................................................98
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).................................36 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
... 98
ECM Terminals and Reference Value.............................98
EC-1
On Board Diagnosis Logic...............................................99 Wiring Diagram.............................................................133
DTC Confirmation Procedure..........................................99 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................134
Wiring Diagram.............................................................100 DTCP0172FUELINJECTIONSYSTEMFUNCTION.137
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................101 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................137
Component Inspection....................................................102 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................137
Removal and Installation................................................102 Wiring Diagram.............................................................139
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................103 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................140
Component Description..................................................103 DTC P0221 TP SENSOR........................................143
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Description.................................................143
. 103 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................103 .143
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................103 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................143
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................104 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................144
Wiring Diagram.............................................................105 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................144
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................106 Wiring Diagram.............................................................145
Component Inspection....................................................108 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................146
Removal and Installation................................................108 Component Inspection...................................................147
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR...........................109 Remove and Installation.................................................148
Component Description..................................................109 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR............................149
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................109 Component Description.................................................149
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................109 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Wiring Diagram.............................................................111 .149
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................112 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................149
Component Inspection....................................................113 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................149
Removal and Installation................................................113 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................150
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR..........................114 Wiring Diagram.............................................................151
Component Description..................................................114 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................152
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................114 Component Inspection...................................................153
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................115 Remove and Installation.................................................154
Wiring Diagram.............................................................116 DTC P0226 APP SENSOR......................................155
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................117 Component Description.................................................155
Component Inspection....................................................118 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Removal and Installation................................................118 .155
DTC P0132 HO2S1.................................................119 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................155
Component Description..................................................119 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................156
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................156
. 119 Wiring Diagram.............................................................157
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................119 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................158
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................120 Remove and Installation.................................................160
Wiring Diagram.............................................................121 DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR..........................161
Component Inspection....................................................123 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Removal and Installation................................................124 .161
DTC P0134 HO2S1.................................................125 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................161
Component Description..................................................125 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................161
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................162
. 125 Wiring Diagram.............................................................163
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................125 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................164
Overall Function Check.................................................126 Remove and Installation.................................................166
Wiring Diagram.............................................................127 DTC P0327, P0328 KS............................................167
Component Inspection....................................................129 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................167
Removal and Installation................................................130 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................167
DTCP0171FUELINJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION. 131 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................167
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................131 Wiring Diagram.............................................................169
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................131 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................170
EC-2
Component Inspection...................................................171 Overall Function Check.................................................206
Removal and Installation...............................................171 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 207 A
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)...........................172 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................208
Component Description.................................................172 DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY........................210
EC
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Description..................................................210
. 172 ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................210
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................172 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................210
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................173 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................210
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................173 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 212 C
Wiring Diagram.............................................................174 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................213
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................175 DTC P1110 IVT CONTROL.....................................215
Component Inspection...................................................177 Description ........................................................... 215 D
Removal and Installation...............................................177 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE).....................178 . 215
Component Description.................................................178 ECM Terminals and Reference Value .................. 215. .E On
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................178 Board Diagnosis Logic..................................................216
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................178 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................216
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................179 Overall Function Check.................................................217
Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 217 F
Wiring Diagram.............................................................180
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................181 DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.....219
Component Inspection...................................................183 Component Description.................................................219
Removal and Installation...............................................183 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode G
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL...............................184 . 219
Component Description.................................................184 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................219
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................184 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 219 H
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................184 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................220
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................185 Wiring Diagram.............................................................221
I
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................188 Component Inspection ......................................... 223
Component Inspection...................................................191 Removal and Installation...............................................223
Removal and Installation...............................................192 DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
DTC P0500 VSS......................................................193 ACTUATOR ............................................................ 224 J
Component Description.................................................193 Description....................................................................224
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................193 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................224
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................193 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 224 K
Overall Function Check.................................................194 DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Wiring Diagram.............................................................195 FUNCTION ............................................................. 226
Description....................................................................226 L
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................197
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR......................................198 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Component Description.................................................198 . 226
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode ECM Terminals and Reference Value .................. 226. .M On
. 198 Board Diagnosis Logic..................................................226
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................198 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................227
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................198 Wiring Diagram.............................................................228
Wiring Diagram.............................................................200 Remove and Installation................................................232
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................201 DTC P1124,P1126 THROTTLE CONTROLMOTOR
Component Inspection...................................................202 RELAY.....................................................................233
DTC P0605 ECM.....................................................203 Component Description.................................................233
Component Description.................................................203 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................203 . 233
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................203 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................233
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................205 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................233
DTC P0650 MIL.......................................................206 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................233
Component Description.................................................206 Wiring Diagram.............................................................235
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................206 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................236
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................206 Component Inspection...................................................237
EC-3
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR.........238 Wiring Diagram.............................................................274
Component Description..................................................238 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................275
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................238 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH.................277
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................238 Component Description.................................................277
Wiring Diagram.............................................................240 .277
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................241 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................277
Component Inspection....................................................242 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................278
Remove and Installation.................................................242 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................278
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE........243 Wiring Diagram.............................................................279
System Description........................................................243 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................281
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Inspection...................................................282
. 243 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH......................284
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................244 Component Description.................................................284
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................244 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Overall Function Check.................................................244 .284
Wiring Diagram.............................................................247 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................284
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................248 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................284
Main 12 Causes of Overheating.....................................255 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................285
Component Inspection....................................................256 Wiring Diagram.............................................................287
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR............................257 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................288
Component Description..................................................257 Component Inspection...................................................293
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR......295
. 257 Component Description.................................................295
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................257 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................295
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................257 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................295
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................258 Wiring Diagram.............................................................296
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................260 DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH.......................................300
Component Inspection....................................................261 Component Description.................................................300
Remove and Installation.................................................262 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.........................................263 .300
Component Description..................................................263 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................300
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................263 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................300
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................263 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................300
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................264 Overall Function Check.................................................301
Remove and Installation.................................................264 Wiring Diagram.............................................................302
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.........................................265 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................303
Component Description..................................................265 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH.................................304
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................265 Description.....................................................................304
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................266 .304
Remove and Installation.................................................266 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................304
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR..........................267 On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................304
Component Description..................................................267 DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................304
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Wiring Diagram.............................................................306
. 267 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................307
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................267 Component Inspection...................................................308
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................267 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR.........................310
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................268 Component Description.................................................310
Wiring Diagram.............................................................269 Wiring Diagram.............................................................311
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................270 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................312
Component Inspection....................................................272 Component Inspection...................................................314
Remove and Installation.................................................272 HO2S1.....................................................................315
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY................273 Component Description.................................................315
On Board Diagnosis Logic.............................................273 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
DTC Confirmation Procedure........................................273 .315
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................315
EC-4
Wiring Diagram.............................................................316 Wiring Diagram.............................................................357
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................317 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 360 A
Component Inspection...................................................318 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH..........................................366
Removal and Installation...............................................320 Component Description.................................................366
EC
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
SOLENOID VALVE.................................................321 . 366
Description....................................................................321 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................366
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Wiring Diagram.............................................................367
. 321 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 368 C
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................321 ASCD INDICATOR..................................................374
Wiring Diagram.............................................................323 Component Description.................................................374
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................324 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode D
Component Inspection...................................................327 . 374
Removal and Installation...............................................327 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................374
VIAS........................................................................328 Wiring Diagram .................................................... 375 E
Description....................................................................328 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................377
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode DATA LINK CONNECTOR......................................379
. 329 Wiring Diagram.............................................................379
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................329 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM .................... 380 F
Wiring Diagram.............................................................330 Description....................................................................380
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................331 Component Inspection...................................................382
Component Inspection...................................................334 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION .............. 383 G
Removal and Installation...............................................335 Description....................................................................383
INJECTOR CIRCUIT...............................................336 Component Inspection...................................................383
Component Description.................................................336 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 385 H
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode System Description........................................................385
. 336 Component Description.................................................386
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................336 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)....387
I
Wiring Diagram.............................................................337 Fuel Pressure ...................................................... 387
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................338 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing.....................................387
Component Inspection...................................................340 Mass Air Flow Sensor...................................................387
Removal and Installation...............................................340 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................ 387...J Engine
START SIGNAL......................................................341 Coolant Temperature Sensor.........................................387
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater....................................387
. 341 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ...................... 387 K
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................341 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)..............................387
Wiring Diagram.............................................................342 Throttle Control Motor..................................................387
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................343 Injector ................................................................. 387
Fuel Pump......................................................................387 L
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT.............................................345
Description....................................................................345
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode YD
. 345 M
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................345 INDEX FOR DTC.....................................................388
Wiring Diagram.............................................................347 Alphabetical Index.........................................................388
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................348 DTC No. Index..............................................................388
Component Inspection...................................................350 PRECAUTIONS.......................................................390
Removal and Installation...............................................351 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR..................352 "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- SIONER"..390
Component Description.................................................352 Precautions....................................................................390
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................352 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis......................392
Wiring Diagram.............................................................353 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM.................................393
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................354 System Diagram............................................................393
Removal and Installation...............................................355 System Chart.................................................................394
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL.................................356 Fuel Injection Control System.......................................394
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Fuel Injection Timing Control System..........................396
. 356 Air Conditioning Cut Control........................................396
EC-5
Fuel Cut Control (At No Load & High Engine Speed). 396 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................451
Crankcase Ventilation System.......................................397 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................452
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................398 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................452
Fuel Filter......................................................................398 Wiring Diagram.............................................................453
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning..............398 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................454
Fuel Pressure Relief Valve............................................399 Component Inspection...................................................457
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM...........401 Removal and Installation...............................................458
DTC and MIL Detection Logic.....................................401 DTC P0190 COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)...................................401 SENSOR..................................................................459
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System).................................401 Description....................................................................459
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)...............................402 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS..........................................404 .459
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction.....................................404 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................459
Basic Inspection.............................................................407 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................459
Symptom Matrix Chart..................................................411 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................459
Engine Control Component Parts Location...................415 Wiring Diagram.............................................................460
Circuit Diagram.............................................................418 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................461
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...................420 Component Inspection...................................................462
ECM Terminals And Reference Value..........................420 Removal and Installation...............................................462
CONSULT-II Function.................................................426 DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR...................463
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Description....................................................................463
. 431 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode434 .463
TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENTINCI- ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................463
DENT.......................................................................435 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................464
Description....................................................................435 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................465
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM...................436 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................468
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................436 Component Inspection...................................................469
Wiring Diagram.............................................................437 Removal and Installation...............................................469
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................438 DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR
Component Inspection...................................................441 (TDC).......................................................................470
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) . 442 Description....................................................................470
Component Description.................................................442 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode .470
. 442 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................470
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................443 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................471
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................443 Wiring Diagram.............................................................472
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................445 Component Inspection...................................................473
Removal and Installation...............................................446 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR.......475
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Description....................................................................475
(ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT).....................................447 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................475
Description....................................................................447 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................475
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................447 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................475
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................447 Wiring Diagram.............................................................477
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................449 Component Inspection...................................................478
Removal and Installation...............................................450 DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS)......480
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Description....................................................................480
SENSOR..................................................................451 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................480
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Overall Function Check.................................................480
. 451 Wiring Diagram.............................................................481
EC-6
DTC P1107 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR ... 485 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................517
Description....................................................................485 Removal and Installation ..................................... 517. .A DTC
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................485 P1510 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................485 SWITCH...................................................................519
EC
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................485 Description....................................................................519
DTC P1180 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR........487 CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode
Description....................................................................487 . 519
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................519
. 487 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 520 C
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................487 Wiring Diagram.............................................................521
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................487 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 522 D
Wiring Diagram.............................................................488 Component Inspection...................................................523
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................489 Removal and Installation...............................................523
Removal and Installation...............................................489 DTC P1606 ECM .................................................... 524 E
DTC P1216 EDU......................................................490 Description....................................................................524
Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 524 F
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................491
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................491 DTC P1621 ECM RELAY........................................526
Wiring Diagram.............................................................492 ECM Terminals and Reference valve............................526
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................494 On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 526 G
Removal and Installation...............................................496 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................526
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)......497 Wiring Diagram.............................................................527
Description....................................................................497 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 528 H
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Component Inspection...................................................529
. 497 DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE..........................530
I
On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................497 DTC Confirmation Procedure .............................. 530
Overall Function Check.................................................498 Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................530
Wiring Diagram.............................................................499 GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM...................................532
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................500 Description ........................................................... 532 J
Main 12 Causes of Overheating....................................506 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................532
Component Inspection...................................................507 Wiring Diagram.............................................................533
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL VALVE. 508 Diagnostic Procedure .......................................... 534 K
Description....................................................................508 Component Inspection...................................................538
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Removal and Installation...............................................538
. 508 EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM ..................... 539
....................................................................................
ECM Terminals and Reference Value...........................508 L
Description....................................................................539
DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................509
. 539
Wiring Diagram.............................................................510
ECM Terminals and Reference Value .................. 540. .M Wiring
Diagram.........................................................................541
Component Inspection...................................................512
Removal and Installation...............................................512
DTC P1301 - P1304 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUST-
MENT RESISTOR...................................................513
BRAKE SWITCH.....................................................546
Description....................................................................513
Description....................................................................546
Wiring Diagram.............................................................547
Wiring Diagram.............................................................514
Diagnostic Procedure....................................................515
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH.........551
Description....................................................................551
DTC P1305 FUEL LEAK.........................................517
. 551
EC-7
Wiring Diagram.............................................................552 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL..............................561
START SIGNAL......................................................555 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR......................562
Wiring Diagram.............................................................555 Wiring Diagram (For South Africa)...............................562
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................556 Wiring Diagram (Except for South Africa)....................563
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH......557 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)....564
Component Description..................................................557 General Specifications...................................................564
CONSULT-IIReferenceValueinDataMonitorMode Mass Air Flow Sensor....................................................564
. 557 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor..............................564
ECM Terminals and Reference Value............................557 Common Rail Fuel Pressure Sensor...............................564
Wiring Diagram.............................................................558 Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC).................................564
Diagnostic Procedure.....................................................559 Camshaft Position Sensor..............................................564
Component Inspection....................................................560 Glow Plug......................................................................564
Removal and Installation................................................560 Egr Volume Control Valve............................................564
EC-8
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024
A
Alphabetical Index EBS00FWM
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to EC
EC-95 .
Items DTC*1
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page C
CONSULT-II ECM*3
APP SEN 1/CIRC*5 P0227 0227 EC-161
APP SEN 1/CIRC*5 P0228 0228 EC-161 D

APP SEN 2/CIRC*5 P1227 1227 EC-267
APP SEN 2/CIRC*5 P1228 1228 EC-267

E
APP SENSOR*5 P0226 0226 EC-155
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 EC-284
ASCD SW P1564 1564 EC-277 F
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 EC-295

BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 EC-304
G
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 6 EC-95
1000*
CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 EC-172
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 EC-178 H
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 EC-263
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 EC-265
I
ECM P0605 0605 EC-203
ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 EC-210
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT* 5 P0117 0117 EC-114 J
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT*5 P0118 0118 EC-114

ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 EC-243
K
ETC ACTR*5 P1121 1121 EC-224
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC*5 P1122 1122 EC-226

L
ETC MOT*5 P1128 1128 EC-238
ETC MOT PWR*5 P1124 1124 EC-233
ETC MOT PWR* 5 P1126 1126 EC-233 M
FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1*2 P0171 0171 EC-131
FUEL SYS-RICH-B1*2 P0172 0172 EC-137
HO2S1 (B1)*2 P0132 0132 EC-119
HO2S1 (B1)*2 P0134 0134 EC-125
HO2S1 HTR (B1)*2 P0031 0031 EC-98
HO2S1 HTR (B1)*2 P0032 0032 EC-98

IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0112 0112 EC-109
IAT SEN/CIRCUIT P0113 0113 EC-109
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P0350 0350 EC-184
INT/V TIM CONT-B1 P1110 1110 EC-215
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 EC-219
EC-9
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
Items DTC*1
(CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM*3
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 EC-167
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 EC-167
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT* 5 P0102 0102 EC-103
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*5 P0103 0103 EC-103

MIL/CIRC P0650 0650 EC-206
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 EC-35
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*4 EC-36
MAY BE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
PW ST P SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 EC-198
P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT P1706 1706 EC-300
SENSOR POWER/CIRC* 5 P1229 1229 EC-273
TP SEN 1/CIRC*5 P0222 0222 EC-149
TP SEN 1/CIRC*5 P0223 0223 EC-149
TP SEN 2/CIRC*5 P1223 1223 EC-257
TP SEN 2/CIRC*5 P1224 1224 EC-257
TP SENSOR*5 P0221 0221 EC-143

VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 EC-193
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: Models with three way catalyst
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*6: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
DTC No. Index EBS00FWN
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
EC-95 .
DTC*1 Items
CONSULT-II 3 (CONSULT-II screen terms) Reference page
ECM*
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*4 FURTHER TESTING EC-36
MAY BE REQUIRED.
U1000 1000*6 CAN COMM CIRCUIT EC-95
NO DTC IS
P0000 0000 DETECTED. FURTHER —
TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED.
P0031 0031 HO2S1 HTR (B1)*2 EC-98
P0032 0032 HO2S1 HTR (B1)*2 EC-98
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*5 EC-103
P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*5 EC-103

P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-109
EC-10
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1 Items A
CONSULT-II ECM*3
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT EC-109
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT* 5 EC-114 EC
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT*5 EC-114
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1)*2 EC-119 C

P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1)*2 EC-125
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1*2 EC-131

D
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1*2 EC-137
P0221 0221 TP SENSOR*5 EC-143

E
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC*5 EC-149
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC*5 EC-149
P0226 0226 APP SENSOR*5 EC-155 F

P0227 0227 APP SEN 1/CIRC*5 EC-161
P0228 0228 APP SEN 1/CIRC*5 EC-161

G
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-167
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-167
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT EC-172 H
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 EC-178
P0350 0350 IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY EC-184
I
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC EC-193
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC EC-198
P0605 0605 ECM EC-203 J
P0650 0650 MIL/CIRC EC-206
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRC EC-210
K
P1110 1110 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 EC-215
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 EC-219
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR*5 EC-224 L
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC* 5 EC-226
P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR*5 EC-233

M
P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR*5 EC-233
P1128 1128 ETC MOT*5 EC-238

P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP EC-243
P1223 1223 TP SEN 2/CIRC* 5 EC-257
P1224 1224 TP SEN 2/CIRC*5 EC-257

P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING EC-263
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING EC-265
P1227 1227 APP SEN 2/CIRC*5 EC-267
P1228 1228 APP SEN 2/CIRC*5 EC-267
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC*5 EC-273

P1564 1564 ASCD SW EC-277
EC-11
INDEX FOR DTC
[QR]
DTC*1 Items
CONSULT-II ECM*3
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW EC-284
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN EC-295
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION EC-35
P1706 1706 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT EC-300
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT EC-304
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*4: When engine is running.
*5: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*6: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
EC-12
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
A
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER" EBS00FWO
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a EC
front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
C
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
D
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section. E
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connec-
tors. F
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T EBS00FWP
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MIL) to warn the driver G
of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, H
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
I
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-71, "HAR- J
NESS CONNECTOR" .
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
K
● Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and L
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution EBS00FWQ
M
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned off.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H
EC-13
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
● Do not disassemble ECM.
● If a battery terminal is disconnected, the memory will
return to the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the terminal is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a problem.
Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown at right.
SEF707Y
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
SEF908W
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys-
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise,
degraded operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
PBIB0090E
● Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions
properly. Refer to EC-61, "ECM Terminals and Reference
Value" .
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
● Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous problems.
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MEF040D
EC-14
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function A
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC Confirmation
Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall Func-
tion Check” should be a good result if the repair is com- EC
pleted.
D
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
SAT652J
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and E
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's F
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque. L
M
SEF348N
PBIB0513E
EC-15
PRECAUTIONS
[QR]
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
SEF709Y
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller.
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EBS00FWR
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

SEF708Y
● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
● PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
● GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"
EC-16
PREPARATION
[QR]
PREPARATION PFP:00002
A
Special Service Tools EBS00FWS
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number Tool name
Description EC
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors with 22 mm (0.87 in)

Heated oxygen sensor wrench
C
D
S-NT379
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

E
Heated oxygen sensor wrench a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
S-NT636
G
Commercial Service Tools EBS00FWT
Tool name Description

H
Quick connector release Removing fuel tube quick connectors in engine room
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG: Part No. 16441 6N21
PBIC0198E J
Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening pressure
L
S-NT653
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor

M
S-NT705
EC-17
PREPARATION
[QR]
Tool name Description
Oxygen sensor Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
thread cleaner before installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with
ie: (J-43897-18) anti-seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for
Zirconia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for
Titania Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

ie: (PermatexTM when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
133AR or equivalent
meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-
907)
S-NT779
EC-18
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
[QR]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
A
System Diagram (Models with Three Way Catalyst) EBS00FWU
EC
PBIB0906E
EC-19
[QR]
System Diagram (Models without Three Way Catalyst) EBS00G7Z
PBIB0907E
EC-20
[QR]
Vacuum Hose Drawing EBS00FWV
EC
PBIB0908E
Refer to EC-19 or EC-20 for Vacuum Control System.
EC-21
[QR]
System Chart EBS00FWW
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)

● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injectors
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic ignition system Power transistors
● Mass air flow sensor Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
● Engine coolant temperature sensor ASCD vehicle speed control Electric throttle control actuator
● Heated oxygen sensor 1*2 On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel)
● Throttle position sensor Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control*2 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater*2
● Accelerator pedal position sensor Power valve control VIAS control solenoid valve
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch EVAP canister purge volume control
EVAP canister purge flow control
● Intake air temperature sensor solenoid valve
● Power steering pressure sensor Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
● Ignition switch
● Battery voltage
● Knock sensor
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
● TCM (Transmission control module)*1
● Wheel sensor
● Air conditioner switch
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays
● Electrical load
● Absolute pressure sensor*3
● Stop lamp switch
● ASCD steering switch
● ASCD brake switch
● ASCD clutch switch
*1: These signals are sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: Models with three way catalyst.
*3: Models for Latin America and Mexico.
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System EBS00FWX
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed
Engine speed
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Heated oxygen sensor 1*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
Ignition switch Start signal Fuel injection &
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition mixture ratio Fuel injectors
control
Battery Battery voltage
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
Wheel sensor Vehicle speed
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
Absolute pressure sensor*2 Ambient air barometric pressure
EC-22
[QR]
*2: Models for Latin America and Mexico.
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of time the
valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the ECM memory. The
program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined by input signals (for engine EC
speed and intake air) from both the crankshaft position sensor and the mass air flow sensor.
C
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operating
conditions as listed below.
D
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up
● When starting the engine
E
● During acceleration
● Hot-engine operation
● When selector lever is changed from “N” to “D” F
● High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration G
● During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)(MODELS WITH THREE H
WAY CATALYST)
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control. The three
way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
L heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the
PBIB0121E
injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about heated
oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-125 . This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air- M
fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback control stops
in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration
● High-load, high-speed operation
● Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up
● After shifting from “N” to “D”
● When starting the engine
EC-23
[QR]
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL (MODELS WITH THREE WAY CATALYST)
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoretical
mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig- inally designed. Both
manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic changes during operation (i.e., injector
clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is then
computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim includes
short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical value. The
signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the theoretical
value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in fuel volume if it
is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation of the
short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences, wear over
time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.
Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used when the
engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of the same
width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
EC-24
[QR]
Electronic Ignition (EI) System EBS00FWY
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

EC
Engine speed
Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air C
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position D
Ignition switch Start signal Ignition timing
control Power transistor
Knock sensor Engine knocking
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position E
F
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-
G
fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition tim-
ing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and
camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition H
signals are transmitted to the power transistor. e.g.,
N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the I
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
● At starting
● During warm-up J
● At idle
● At low battery voltage K
SEF742M
● During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed within the anti-
knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
L operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control EBS00FWZ M
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle
Ignition switch Start signal
Air conditioner Air conditioner relay
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure cut control
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. Under
the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
EC-25
[QR]
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine.
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) EBS00FX0

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Fuel cut control Fuel injectors
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 1,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 1,800 rpm) fuel will
be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will operate
until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-22 .
Can communication (A/T models) EBS00G80
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- tiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units
are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation
(not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN
L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but
selectively reads required data only.
SYSTEM DIAGRAM

T: Transmit R: Receive
SKIA0884E Signals ECM TCM
Engine speed signal T R
Engine coolant temperature signal T R
Accelerator pedal position signal T R
A/T self-diagnosis signal R T
Output shaft revolution signal R T
EC-26
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
[QR]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
A
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check EBS00FX2
IDLE SPEED
● Using CONSULT-II
EC
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
E
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
● Method A SEF058Y F
– Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
– Check ignition timing.
G
● Method B
J
– Remove No. 1 ignition coil. PBIB0515E
– Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable high-
tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this wire.
PBIB0509E
PBIB0516E
EC-27
[QR]
SEF166Y
– Check ignition timing.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning EBS00FX4
DESCRIPTION
PBIB0514E
“Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal
by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF” wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning EBS00FX3
DESCRIPTION
“Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of electric
throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning EBS00FX5
DESCRIPTION
“Idle Air Volume Learning” is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
EC-28
[QR]
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
EC-29
[QR]
PREPARATION
Before performing “Idle Air Volume Learning”, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied. A
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100C (158 - 212F) EC
● PNP switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) C
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)

● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up D
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/
T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes. E
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II F
1. Perform EC-28, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning" .
2. Perform EC-28, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. G
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITIONING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. H
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.

L
SEF217Z
SEF454Y
EC-30
[QR]
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If
“INCMP” is displayed, “Idle Air Volume Learning” will not be car-
ried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the problem by
referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure” below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed
and ignition timing are within the specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 70050 rpm
A/T: 70050 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing M/T: 155 BTDC
A/T: 155 BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
SEF455Y
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic “PRE-CONDITIONING” (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking
and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned “ON”.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
PBIB0665E
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
ITEM SPECIFICATION
Idle speed M/T: 70050 rpm
A/T: 70050 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Ignition timing M/T: 155 BTDC
A/T: 155 BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, the result will be incomplete. In this case, find the
EC-31
[QR]
cause of the problem by referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure” below.
EC-32
[QR]
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows: A
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation.
EC
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the problem.
It is useful to perform EC-84, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE" . C
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
problem and perform “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
D
– Engine stalls.
– Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check EBS00FX6 E
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
With CONSULT-II F
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II. G
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
H
pressure.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
J
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box.
2. Start engine. SEF214Y K
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. L
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
● The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure PBIB0508E check must not be used for
other purposes.
● Take care for not to scratch and not to put debris around connection area when servicing, so that
the quick connector keeps sealability with O-rings inside.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-31, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" .
2. Prepare fuel hose and fuel hose clamp for fuel pressure check, and connect fuel pressure gauge.
● Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector).
● To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use moderately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
● Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
● Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
EC-33
[QR]
3. Remove fuel hose. Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
● Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
● Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
● Keep the original fuel hose to be free from intrusion of dust or foreign substances with a suitable cover.
4. Install the fuel pressure gauge as shown in the figure.

● Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth moist-
ened with gasoline.
● Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel tube and
No.1 spool.
● Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches the No.1
spool on fuel tube.
● Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or
16439 40U00).
● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
● When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
PBIB0669E
● Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in).
Tightening torque: 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13

in-lb)
● Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
5. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose with
a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel tube does
not come off.
6. Turn ignition switch “ON”, and check for fuel leakage.
7. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
8. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operating. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.
● During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
PBIB0670E
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.7 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

9. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
10. Check the following.
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
● Fuel filter for clogging
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If

NG, repair or replace.
EC-34
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
[QR]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
A
Introduction EBS00FX7
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actuators. The
ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including: EC
Emission-related diagnostic information
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Freeze Frame data C
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
D
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
: Applicable —: Not applicable
E
1st trip Freeze Frame
DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data
data
CONSULT-II    
F
ECM  1 — —
*
*1: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in G
two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-43 .)
Two Trip Detection Logic EBS00FX8

H
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the ECM
memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
I
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during
vehicle operation. When the ECM enters fail-safe mode (Refer to EC-43 .) or the DTC is stored in the ECM memory even
in the 1st trip. J
Emission-related Diagnostic Information EBS00FX9
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

K
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip DTC will
not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
L light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required driving
pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, M
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd trips, only
the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For fail-safe items, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory even in the 1st
trip.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-34, "HOW TO
ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame data as
specified in “Work Flow” procedure Step II, refer to EC-40 . Then perform “DTC Confirmation Proce- dure” or
“Overall Function Check” to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires repair.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Examples: P0117, P0340, P1065, etc.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
Without CONSULT-II
EC-35
[QR]
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC. Example:
0117, 0340 1065 etc.
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, the Diagnostic Test Mode II does not indicate
whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is
displayed in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was
driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”. If a
1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature,
short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake air temperature at
the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data. The data,
stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II. For details, see EC-72 .
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the ECM. 1st
trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze
frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip
detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set
of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is
erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-34, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS- SION-RELATED
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II)
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF- DIAG
RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Touch “ENGINE”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
EC-36
[QR]
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
A
EC
How to Erase DTC ( Without CONSULT-II) G

1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once.
2. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
H
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-37, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● IfPBIB0671E
the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost after
approx. 24 hours.
I
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
– Diagnostic trouble codes
J
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
– Freeze frame data
– 1st trip freeze frame data K
– Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures. L
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) EBS00FXA
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

M
the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed
on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to BL-137, "NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)" .
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode
with CONSULT-II.
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and
registration of all NATS ignition key IDs must be carried
out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.
Regarding the procedures of NATS initialization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to
CONSULT-II operation manual, NATS.
SEF515Y
EC-37
[QR]
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) EBS00FXB
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
● If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-38, "WARNING LAMPS" ,
or see EC-206 .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
SAT652J
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
“ON” position circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a
malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up the MIL in the 1st trip.
● Fail-safe mode
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
“ON” position RESULTS
Engine stopped
Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or rich),
MONITOR*1 monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.
*1 :Models with three way catalyst
MIL Flashing without DTC

If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diagnostic
test mode. EC-37, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later EC- 37 .
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
1. Diagnostic trouble codes
2. 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
EC-38
[QR]
3. Freeze frame data
4. 1st trip freeze frame data A
5. Others
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
EC
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit C
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results) D
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch “ON” and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. E
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts blinking. F
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
G
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)

1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-37, "How to Set Diagnostic K
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)" .
PBIB0092E
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
L
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-37, "How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II
(Self-diagnostic Results)" .
M
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI- 38,
"WARNING LAMPS" or seeEC-206 .
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected or the ECM's CPU is malfunctioning.
OFF No malfunction.
● These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
EC-39
[QR]
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test mode I
(Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL illuminates in
diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are displayed, they may be
either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden- tified codes can be identified by
using the CONSULT-II. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code.
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated by the
SEF952W
number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an
ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later numeral
appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no malfunction. (See
EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC" )
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC- 37, "HOW
TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE" .
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory after approx 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR
In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated oxygen
sensor 1.
MIL Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
OFF Rich Closed loop system
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system

*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.
To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until engine
coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
EC-40
[QR]
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the MIL comes
ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
EC-41
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
A
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction EBS00FXC
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel control,
EC
ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts input
signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essential that
both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no problems such as vac- C
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other problems with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit-

tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
MEF036D F
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace- ment
of good parts.
G
I
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road test
with CONSULT-II (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
SEF233G
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-40 . J
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can
supply good information about such problems, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under K
what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the example
on EC-42 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This L
will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically con-
trolled engine vehicle.
SEF234G
EC-42
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
WORK FLOW
Flow Chart
PBIB0912E
*1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” *2 If the incident cannot be verified, perform *3 If the on board diagnostic system cannot be
is other than “0” or “[1t]”, perform EC- EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR performed, check main power supply and
88, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- SIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . ground circuit. Refer to
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" EC-89, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
. ECM" .
*4 If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, *5 EC-84
perform EC-88, "TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT" .
EC-43
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Description for Work Flow
A
STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
“DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET”, EC-41 .
EC
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II or GST) the (1st trip) DTC and the (1st
trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-34 .) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame
data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . Study the C
STEP II
relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The “Symptom
Matrix Chart” will be useful. See EC-50 .)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
D
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the
STEP III vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . If E
the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read the (1st trip)
DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II or GST.
F
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode
and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The (1st trip) DTC G
cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
H
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
STEP V If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-45 .) Then perform inspections according
to the Symptom Matrix Chart. (Refer to EC-50 .)
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the system for I
mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II. Refer to J
EC-61 , EC-79 .
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is
STEP VI also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in GI-24, "How to
Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" .
K
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- DENT" .
L
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident is still
STEP VII detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one. M
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM. (Refer to
EC-34, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION" .)
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine
components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting
faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important
to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order to
organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and DTC
to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
EC-44
SEF907L
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
Worksheet Sample
MTBL0017
DTC Inspection Priority Chart EBS00FXD
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
EC-95 .
EC-45
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Priority Detected items (DTC) A

1 ● U1000 CAN communication line
● P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
● P0112 P0113 Intake air temperature sensor EC
● P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0221 P0222 P0223 P1223 P1224 P1225 P1226 Throttle position sensor
● P0226 P0227 P0228 P1227 P1228 Accelerator pedal position sensor C
● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) D
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
● P0605 ECM
E
● P1229 Sensor power supply
● P1610-P1615 NATS
● P1706 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
F
2 ● P0031 P0032 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
● P0132 P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1
● P0650 MIL G
● P1065 ECM power supply
● P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
● P1122 Electric throttle control function H
● P1124 P1126 Throttle control motor relay
● P1128 Throttle control motor
● P1805 Brake switch I
3 ● P0171 P0172 Fuel injection system function
● P1110 Intake valve timing control
J
● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
● P1564 ASCD steering switch
K
● P1572 ASCD brake switch
● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
Fail-safe Chart EBS00FXE L

When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode M

P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition
P0118 ture sensor circuit switch “ON” or “START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT- II
Condition
display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
40C (104F)
ON or Start
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80C (176F)
ignition ON or Start
40 - 80C (104 - 176F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan
operates while engine is running.
EC-46
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0221 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0222 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0223 The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees.
P1223 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1224
P0226 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0227 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0228 The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees.
P1227 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P1228
P1121 Electric throttle control actu- While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the
ator engine stalls.
(ECM detect the throttle The engine can restart in “N” or “P” position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
valve is stuck open.) more.
P1122 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed
tion opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1124 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed
P1126 opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed
opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed
opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
EC-47
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Basic Inspection EBS00FXF
1. INSPECTION START A
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem, or a current need for scheduled
maintenance. EC
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut C
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
D
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied. E
– Headlamp switch is OFF.
– Air conditioner switch is OFF.
– Rear window defogger switch is OFF. F
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc. SEF983U
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge. G
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
J
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no- load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or GST. K
SEF976U
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. L
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding “Diagnostic Procedure”.

SEF977U
>> GO TO 3.
EC-48
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
3. CHECK TARGET IDLE
SPEED With CONSULT-II

1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no- load,
then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

M/T: 700  50 rpm
SEF978U
A/T: 700  50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
SEF058Y
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T: 700  50 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 5.
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 6.
EC-49
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
6. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
A
Refer to EC-28, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP
EC
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT >> GO TO 7.
INCMP >> 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
C
2. GO TO 4.
7. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
D
With CONSULT-II
E
M/T: 700  50 rpm

A/T: 700  50 rpm (in “P or “N” position) F
Without CONSULT-II
G
M/T: 700  50 rpm

A/T: 700  50 rpm (in “P” or “N” position) H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8. I
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART

J
Check the Following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-178 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-172 . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace. L
2. GO TO 4.
9. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

M
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is
the rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-35, "NATS
(Nissan Anti-theft System)" .
>> GO TO 4.
EC-50
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
10. CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.

2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
M/T: 15  5 BTDC
A/T: 15  5 BTDC (in P or “N” position)
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 13.
13. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Refer to EC-28, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .

Which is the result CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT or INCMP
CMPLT >> GO TO 14.
INCMP >> 1. Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”.
2. GO TO 4.
14. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
AGAIN With CONSULT-II

M/T: 700  50 rpm
A/T: 700  50 rpm (in “P or “N” position)
Without CONSULT-II
M/T: 700  50 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
EC-51
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
A
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
EC
M/T: 15  5 BTDC
A/T: 15  5 BTDC (in “P” or “N” position)
OK or NG C
NG >> GO TO 16.
D
16. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-44, "TIMING CHAIN" .
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
F
2. GO TO 4.

G
Check the following.
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-178 .
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-172 . H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace. I
2. GO TO 4.
18. CHECK ECM FUNCTION J

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is
the rarely the case.)
K
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-35, "NATS
L
>> GO TO 4.
EC-52
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Symptom Matrix Chart EBS00FXG
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
Reference
page
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-345
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-31
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-336
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-380
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-383
tem
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-45
EC-224,
EC-224 ,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-233 ,
EC-238
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-45
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-184
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-89
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-103
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 EC-114
EC-143,
EC-149 ,
EC-257 ,
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-263 ,
EC-265 ,
EC-273
EC-155,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 2 2 EC-161 ,
EC-267
EC-98, EC-
119 , EC-
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 125 , EC-
315
Knock sensor circuit 2 2 3 EC-167
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-172
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 2 2 EC-178
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-193
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 EC-198
EC-53
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
Reference
page D
ENGINE STALL
E

F
EC-43,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-203
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir- EC-215,
3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 G
cuit EC-219
VIAS control solenoid valve circuit 1 EC-328
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-300
H
Start signal circuit 2 EC-341
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 4 EC-352
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-356 I
Air conditioner circuit ATC-32,
2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2
MTC-30
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. J
(continued on next page)
EC-54
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
SYMPTOM




ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
Reference
page
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel tank FL-9
5 EM-30, FL-
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5
3
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
line, Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-15
Air cleaner EM-15
Air leakage from air duct (Mass
air flow sensor —electric throttle EM-15
control actuator)
5 5 5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator 5 5 5 5 EM-17
Air leakage from intake manifold/
EM-17
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery SC-3
Alternator circuit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SC-12
Starter circuit 3 SC-21
Signal plate 6 EM-68
PNP switch AT-133 or
4
MT-12
Engine Cylinder head
Cylinder head gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 3 EM-53
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
Connecting rod
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-68
Bearing
Crankshaft
EC-55
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
Reference
page D
ENGINE STALL
E

F
Valve Timing chain EM-44
mecha-
Camshaft EM-34
nism
Intake valve timing control EM-44 G
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Intake valve
Exhaust valve 3 EM-53
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ H

Gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-22, EX-
Three way catalyst 2
Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil EM-24, LU- I

tion filter/Oil gallery 11 , LU-10 ,
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 LU-14
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-8 J
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap CO-12,
CO-15
Thermostat 5 CO-21 K
Water pump CO-19
Water gallery CO-7
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 5 L
Cooling fan 5 CO-12
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
CO-9
coolant
M
EC-35 or
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) 1 1
BL-137
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
EC-56
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Engine Control Component Parts Location EBS00FXH
PBIB0921E
EC-57
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC
PBIB0922E
EC-58
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
PBIB0486E
EC-59
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC
PBIB0923E
EC-60
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
PBIB0924E
EC-61
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Circuit Diagram EBS00FXI
EC
TBWA0134E
EC-62
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TBWA0135E
EC-63
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout EBS00FXJ
EC
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00FXK
PREPARATION E
1. ECM
SEF970W is located behind the glove box. For this inspection, remove
glove box.
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
F
3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector con-

nected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily. I
PBIB0493E
● Open harness securing clip to make testing easier.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.

● Data is for comparison and may not be exact. J
L
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and body ground.
CAUTION: MEC486B M
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
2*1
P/L Heated oxygen sen- ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
sor 1 heater
PBIB0519E
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE

● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. (11 - 14V)
EC-64
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Ignition switch “ON”]
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” 0 - 1.0V
10*3 [Engine is running]
29*2 B/P Fuel pump relay
● More than 1 seconds after turning ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
“ON”. (11 - 14V)
Counter current BATTERY VOLTAGE

12 G/W [Ignition switch “ON”]
return (11 - 14V)
● Idle speed (11 - 14V)
Approximately 10V
EVAP canister purge

13 P volume control sole-
[Engine is running]
noid valve
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm
PBIB0520E
[Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V

18 R/Y MIL [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0 - 1.0V
● For 3 seconds after turning ignition switch “OFF”
ECM relay
20 W/G [Ignition switch “OFF”]
(Self shut-off)
● 3 seconds passed after turning ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
“OFF” (11 - 14V)
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
PBIB0521E
21 BR Ignition signal No. 1
22 PU Ignition signal No. 2 0 - 0.2V
23 L/R Ignition signal No. 3
24 GY/R Ignition signal No. 4
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0522E

VIAS control sole-
25 GY/L
noid valve [Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm
EC-65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE A
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON” 0 - 1.0V EC
(Compressor operates).
26 L Air conditioner relay
● A/C switch is “OFF”. (11 - 14V) C
● Cooling fan is not operating (11 - 14V)
Cooling fan relay D
27 LG/B
(High) [Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is high speed operating 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running] E
● Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON” Approximately 0V
(Compressor operates).
Air conditioner cut
30 PU/W [Engine is running]
signal F
● A/C switch is “ON” Approximately 4.6V
(Compressor not operates).
Approximately 2.6V
CAN communication G
33 W/B [Ignition switch “ON”] Output voltage varies with the
line
communication status.
Approximately 2.4V
CAN communication H
34 L/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Output voltage varies with the
line
communication status.
6 - 7V
I
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition J
● Idle speed
PBIB0523E
K
6 - 7V
36 L/OR Tachometer signal
[Engine is running]
L
● Engine speed is 2,500 rpm
M
PBIB0524E

Cooling fan relay
37 L/Y
(Low) [Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is operating 0 - 1.0V
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V

39 G/Y ASCD CRUISE lamp ● CRUISE switch is depressed at first time  second 
time BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Brake pedal fully released Approximately 0V
40 P Stop lamp switch
● Brake pedal fully depressed (11 - 14V)
41 B/Y Start signal [Ignition switch “START”] 9 - 14V
EC-66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V
42 B/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Gear position is “P” or “N”. Approximately 0V
A/T model
43 G/OR PNP switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “ON”] (11 - 14V)
● Except the above gear position M/T model
Approximately 5V
[Engine is running]
● SET switch is “ON”. Approximately 0V
● ASCD control is operating.
47 L ASCD SET lamp
● ASCD control is not operating. (11 - 14V)
50 LG Data link connector ● CONSULT-II is disconnected. Approximately 5V
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE

Electrical load signal ● Rear window defogger switch is “ON” (11 - 14V)
52 R/W (Rear window defog-
ger signal) [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Rear window defogger switch is “OFF” Approximately 0V

● Lighting switch is “2ND” position (11 - 14V)
Electrical load signal
53 R/Y
(Headlamp signal) [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Lighting switch is “OFF” Approximately 0V

● Heater fan control switch is “ON” Approximately 0V
Heater fan switch sig-
55 LG/B
nal [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Heater fan control switch is “OFF” Approximately 5V

● Brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
● Clutch pedal is depressed (M/T models)
56 GY/L ASCD brake switch [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Brake pedal is fully released BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Clutch pedal is fully released (M/T models)
[Engine is running]
58 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
59 B/W
60 B/W [Engine is running]
106 B/Y ECM ground Engine ground
● Idle speed
108 B/Y
EC-67
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE A
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 3V
EC
[Engine is running]
C
● Idle speed
PBIB0527E
62*3
D
71*2 Crankshaft position Approximately 3V
PU/R sensor (POS)
E
[Engine is running]
F
PBIB0528E
1.0 - 4.0V
G
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition H
● Idle speed
PBIB0525E
63*2
71* 3 I
Camshaft position 1.0 - 4.0V
PU/R sensor (PHASE)
[Engine is running] J
K
PBIB0526E
Approximately 2.3V
L

81* 2 L/B Vehicle speed sensor ● Lift up the vehicle
M
● Vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25MPH)
PBIB0531E
Accelerator pedal
64 OR/L position sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 2.5V
power supply
Sensor's power sup-
65 R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
ply
Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
66 W/L [Ignition switch “OFF”]
ECM (Buck-up) (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Steering wheel is being turned. 0.5 - 4.0V
Power steering pres-
67 P
sure sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel is not being turned.
EC-68
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.1 - 1.5V
● Idle speed
72 OR Mass air flow sensor [Engine is running]
● Gear position is “D” (A/T model)
● Gear position is “1st” (M/T model) More than 0.36V
● Accelerator pedal fully released

Throttle position sen-
sor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
73 W
● Gear position is “1st” (M/T model) Less than 4.75V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed


Throttle position sen-
sor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
74 G

● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.41 - 0.71V
Accelerator pedal
75 R/L
position sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed More than 3.67V

Accelerator pedal
76 W/B
position sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”]
[Engine is running]
80 B/P Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
82 W Knock sensor ● Idle speed Approximately 2.5V
[Engine is running]
Refrigerant pressure
83 R/L sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”. 1.0 - 4.0V
(Compressor operates.)
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Intake air tempera-
84 Y/G [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake air
ture sensor
temperature.
Accelerator pedal
86 L position sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
ground
EC-69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE A
COLOR
L NO.
0.52 - 4.6V
Absolute pressure
88*4 SB [Ignition switch “ON”] Output voltage varies with ambi- EC
sensor
ent barometric pressure.
● ASCD steering switch is “OFF”. Approximately 4V C
● CRUISE switch is “ON”. Approximately 0V
[Ignition switch “ON”] D

● CANCEL switch is “ON”. Approximately 1V
89 W/R ASCD steering switch
Approximately 2V E
● SET/COAST switch is “ON”.
● RESUME/ACCEL switch is “ON”. Approximately 3V
F
Accelerator pedal ● Accelerator pedal fully released 0.41 - 0.71V
90 W position sensor sig-
nal output [Ignition switch “ON”] G
[Engine is running]
92* 1 G/W Heated oxygen sen- ● Warm-up condition 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodi- H
sor 1 cally change)
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Engine coolant tem- I
93 BR/Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
perature sensor
engine coolant temperature.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V) J
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition K
● Idle speed
PBIB0529E L
101 R/B Injector No. 1
102 Y/B Injector No. 2 BATTERY VOLTAGE
103 G/B Injector No. 3 (11 - 14V)
104 L/B Injector No. 4 M
[Engine is running]
PBIB0530E
EC-70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
Approximately 4V - BATTERY
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
Intake valve timing

107 Y/R [Engine is running]
control solenoid valve
● When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly
PBIB0532E
109 W Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE

111 W ECM (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “OFF”]
112 W/R Throttle control motor (11 - 14V)
relay [Ignition switch “ON”] 0 - 1.0V
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE
113 W/B [Ignition switch “ON”]
relay power supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V

Throttle control motor
114 R (Open) ● Gear position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal is depressing
PBIB0533E
Throttle control motor [Engine is running]

115 B/Y ground ● Idle speed Approximately 0V
0 - 14V

116 G (Close) ● Gear position is “1st” (M/T model)
● Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB0534E
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*2: Models with NATS
*3: Models without NATS
*4: Models for Latin America and Mexico
CONSULT-II Function EBS00FXL
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the indications
Work support
on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data can be
Self-diagnostic results
read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
EC-71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Diagnostic test mode Function

A
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the other data
Data monitor (SPEC)
monitor items can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts some
Active test EC
parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
C
*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes D
● Freeze frame data
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● Others E
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE F
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA DATA
Item WORK MONI- MONI- ACTIVE
FREEZE G
SUPPORT FRAME TOR TOR TEST
DTC*1
DATA*2 (SPEC)
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)     H

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 
Mass air flow sensor   
Engine coolant temperature sensor      I
Heated oxygen sensor 1   
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Wheel sensor (Vehicle speed signal)    

Accelerator pedal position sensor    J
Throttle position sensor   
Intake air temperature sensor    
Knock sensor 
K
Refrigerant pressure sensor  
N
P
I
Ignition switch (start signal)  

L
Closed throttle position switch (accelerator
 
pedal position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch  
M
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch   
Stop lamp switch   
Power steering pressure sensor   
Absolute pressure sensor  
Battery voltage  
Load signal  
ASCD steering switch   
ASCD brake switch   
EC-72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA DATA
Item WORK FREEZE MONI- MONI- ACTIVE
SUPPORT FRAME TOR TOR TEST
DTC*1
DATA*2 (SPEC)
Injectors   

Power transistor (Ignition timing) (Ignition   
signal)
Throttle control motor relay   
Throttle control motor 
EVAP canister purge volume control sole-
OUT
PUT
  
noid valve
Air conditioner relay  
Fuel pump relay    
Cooling fan relay    
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater   
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve    
VIAS control solenoid valve   
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data mode only if
a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-34 .
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector, which is located
under dash panel (driver side) near the fuse box cover.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Touch “START”.
PBIB0376E
PBR455D
EC-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
A
EC
D
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. SEF995X
E
WORK SUPPORT MODE

H
Work Item
SEF838Z
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure I
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume J
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
K
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
L
TARGET IGNITION TIMING ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
After adjustment, confirm target
ignition timing with a timing light. M
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of “DTC and 1st trip DTC”, refer to EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
EC-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
Description
item*1
DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as “PXXXX”. (Refer to EC-
CODE
9, "INDEX FOR DTC" .)
[PXXXX]
● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
“MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B1 “MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment) “MODE 4”:
Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
COOLANT TEMP [C]
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [F]
● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule than
short-term fuel trim.
● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VHCL SPEED [km/h]
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE [C]
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [F]
*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
: Applicable
CAN
ECM
MAI DIAG
Monitored item INPUT
N SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
SIG- PORT
NALS
NALS MNTR
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine
● Indicates the engine speed computed from speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED [rpm]   the signal of the crankshaft position sensor ● If the signal is interrupted while the
(POS). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When the engine is stopped, a
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]  
sensor is displayed. certain value is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
[msec] 
ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
● When the engine is stopped, a
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio certain value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]  feedback correction factor per cycle is ● This data also includes the data for
indicated. the air-fuel ratio learning control.
EC-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
CAN
ECM A
MAI DIAG
[Unit] SIG-
SIG- PORT
NALS
NALS MNTR
EC
● When the engine coolant tempera-
● The engine coolant temperature (deter- ture sensor is open or short-cir-
COOLAN TEMP/S   mined by the signal voltage of the engine cuited, ECM enters fail-safe mode. The
coolant temperature sensor) is displayed. engine coolant temperature C
[C] or [F]
determined by the ECM is dis-
played.
● The signal voltage of heated oxygen D
HO2S1 (B1) [V]  
sensor 1 is displayed.
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 signal ● After turning ON the ignition
during air-fuel ratio feedback control: switch, “RICH” is displayed until E
RICH ... means the mixture became “rich”, air-fuel mixture ratio feedback
and control is being affected toward a control begins.
HO2S1 MNTR (B1)   leaner mixture. ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
[RICH/LEAN] LEAN ... means the mixture became F
clamped, the value just before the
“lean”, and control is being affected clamping is displayed continu-
toward a rich mixture. ously.
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the G
 
[km/h] or [mph] vehicle speed signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
  H
[V] played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V]   ● The accelerator pedal position sensor
ACCEL SEN 2 [V]  signal voltage is displayed.
I
THRTL SEN 1 [V]   ● The throttle position sensor signal volt-
THRTL SEN 2 [V]  age is displayed.
● The intake air temperature (determined by J

INT/A TEMP SE
  the signal voltage of the intake air
[C] or [F]
temperature sensor) is indicated.
● After starting the engine, [OFF] is
START SIGNAL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the K
  displayed regardless of the starter
[ON/OFF] starter signal.
signal.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com-
CLSD THL POS L
  puted by ECM according to the acceler-
[ON/OFF]
ator pedal position sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
AIR COND SIG M
  conditioner switch as determined by the air
[ON/OFF]
conditioner signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
P/N POSI SW
  park/neutral position (PNP) switch sig-
[ON/OFF]
nal.
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steer-
PW/ST SIGNAL ing system (determined by the signal
[ON/OFF]   voltage of the power steering pressure
sensor signal) is indicated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal.
ON ... Rear window defogger switch is ON
LOAD SIGNAL and/or lighting switch is in 2nd position.
 
[ON/OFF] OFF ... Both rear window defogger
switch and lighting switch are OFF.
EC-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
CAN
ECM
MAI DIAG
[Unit] SIG-
SIG- PORT
NALS
NALS MNTR
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-

[ON/OFF] tion switch.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

[ON/OFF] heater fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the

[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse ● When the engine is stopped, a
INJ PULSE-B1
 width compensated by ECM according to certain computed value is indi-
[msec]
the input signals. cated.
IGN TIMING ● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ● When the engine is stopped, a

[BTDC] ECM according to the input signals. certain value is indicated.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control value
PURG VOL C/V computed by the ECM according to the
[%] input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
INT/V TIM ● Indicates [CA] of intake camshaft
(B1) [CA] advanced angle.
● The control condition of the intake valve
timing control solenoid valve (determined
by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
ON ... intake valve timing control is oper-
INT/V SOL (B1) [%]
ating.
OFF ... Intake valve timing control is not
operating.
● The control condition of the VIAS control
solenoid valve (determined by ECM
according to the input signals) is indi-
cated.
VIAS S/V
[ON/OFF] ON ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
operating.
OFF ... VIAS control solenoid valve is
not operating.
● The air conditioner relay control condi-
AIR COND RLY
 tion (determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals) is indicated.
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control
FUEL PUMP RLY
 condition determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals.
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY
 control condition determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.
● Indicates the condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the input
COOLING FAN signals).
[HI/LOW/OFF] HI ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation
OFF ... Stop
EC-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
CAN
ECM A
MAI DIAG
[Unit] SIG-
SIG- PORT
NALS
NALS MNTR
EC
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
oxygen sensor 1 heater determined by
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
C
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
YET ... Idle air volume learning has not
been performed yet. D
IDL A/V
LEARN CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has
[YET/CMPLT/ already been performed successfully.
INCMP] INCMP ... Idle air volume learning has
E
not been performed successfully.
ABSOL PRES/SE ● The signal voltage of absolute pressure

[V] sensor is displayed.
F
● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1
O2SEN HTR DTY
heater control value computed by the
[%]
ECM according to the input signals.
AC PRESS SEN ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
G
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
● The vehicle speed computed from the
VHCL SPEED SE H
vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is
[km/h] or [mph]
displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
● The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph] I
MAIN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] CRUISE switch signal.
CANCEL SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CAN- J
[ON/OFF] CEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] ACCEL/RES switch signal. K
SET SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] COAST/SET switch signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from L
BRAKE SW1 SW
ASCD brake switch signal, and ASCD
[ON/OFF]
clutch switch signal (M/T models).
BRAKE SW2 SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop M
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON ... Vehicle speed is maintained at
the ASCD set speed.
VHCL SPD CUT CUT ...Vehicle speed increased to
[NON/CUT] excessively high compared with the
ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation is
cut off.
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON ... Vehicle speed is maintained at
the ASCD set speed.
LO SPEED CUT CUT ...Vehicle speed decreased to
[NON/CUT] excessively low compared with the ASCD
set speed, and ASCD operation is cut off.
EC-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
CAN
ECM
MAI DIAG
[Unit] SIG-
SIG- PORT
NALS
NALS MNTR
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
AT OD MONITOR
according to the input signal from the
[ON/OFF]
TCM.
AT OD CANCEL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
[ON/OFF] cancel signal sent from the TCM.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
CRUISE LAMP
CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp
SET LAMP
determined by the ECM according to the
[ON/OFF]
input signals.
Voltage [V]
Frequency [msec], ● Only “#” is displayed if item is
[Hz] or [%] unable to be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Figures with “#”s are temporary
● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse ones. They are the same figures as
DUTY-LOW width measured by the probe. an actual piece of data which was
PLS WIDTH-HI just previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
CAN COMM

[OK/NG]
CAN CIRC1

[OK/UNKWN
]
CAN CIRC2

[OK/UNKWN
● Indicates the communication condition of ● These items are not displayed in
]
CAN communication line. “SELECTION FROM MENU”
CAN CIRC3 mode.

[OK/UNKWN
]
CAN CIRC4

[OK/UNKWN
]
CAN CIRC5

[OK/UNKWN
]
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

Monitored Item
ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
● Indicates the engine speed computed from
ENG SPEED [rpm]  the signal of the crankshaft position sensor
(POS).
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When engine is running specification
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V]  
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated.
EC-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
ECM
Main A
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification EC
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.
rection.
● When engine is running specification C
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
 back correction factor per cycle is indi-
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] ● This data also includes the data for the air-
cated. fuel ratio learning control.
D
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE E

Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
F
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
TION CHECK ITEM. ● Fuel injectors
● Change the amount of fuel injec-
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1 G
● Engine: Return to the original
trouble condition
IGNITION ● Timing light: Set If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Perform “Idle Air Volume Learn- H
TIM- ING ● Retard the ignition timing using CHECK ITEM. ing”.
CONSULT-II.
● Harness and connectors
I
● Engine: After warming up, idle
the engine. ● Compression
POWER BAL- ● A/C switch “OFF” ● Fuel injectors
ANCE Engine runs rough or dies. J
● Shift lever “N” ● Power transistor
● Cut off each injector signal one at a ● Spark plugs
time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coils
K
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors
COOLING FAN ● Turn the cooling fan “ON” and Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan relay
“OFF” with CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan motor L
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. ● Fuel injectors M
perature using CONSULT-II.
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
FUEL PUMP ● Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” Fuel pump relay makes the operating
RELAY and “OFF” using CONSULT-II sound. ● Fuel pump relay
and listen to operating sound.
● Ignition switch: ON
● Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes an operating ● Harness and connectors
VIAS SOL VALVE “OFF” with CONSULT-II and lis- sound. ● Solenoid valve
ten for operating sound.
EC-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
● Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to the ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
● Engine: Return to the original
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)

Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in
real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI- TOR”
in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ... xx
%” as shown at right, and the data after the malfunction detection
is recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, “REAL-
TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched on the
screen during “Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG”
screen is also displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording
speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and “Recording Speed”.
Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MAN- UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): SEF705Y
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed

automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction
is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a
malfunction is detected.
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select
to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction SEF707X at the moment it is detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”
mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, components and
harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/ 1st trip DTC will
be displayed. (Refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” in GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an
Electrical Incident" .)
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for further
diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
EC-81
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00FXM

I
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector. J
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in spite of
the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
K
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
PBIB0197E ● Tachometer: Connect
ENG SPEED ● Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II Almost the same speed as the L
value. CONSULT-II value.
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 1.1 - 1.5V

● Air conditioner switch: OFF M
MAS A/F SE-B1 ● Shift lever: N 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 2.0V
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.5- 3.5 msec
● Shift lever: N
B/FUEL SCHDL ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● No-load
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
A/F ALPHA-B1 ● Engine: After warming up 54% - 155%
rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70C (158F)
HO2S1 (B1)*1 ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V  Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
LEAN  RICH
HO2S1 MNTR Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
(B1)*1 rpm
ing 10 seconds.
EC-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
● Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as the
VEH SPEED SE
SULT-II value. CONSULT-II value
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.41 - 0.71V

ACCEL SEN1 (engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed More than 3.67V

Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1 ● Shift lever:
THRTL SEN2 D (A/T model) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T model)
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON  START  ON OFF  ON  OFF
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
CLSD THL POS ● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
AIR COND SIG ● Engine: After warming up, idle Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
Shift lever:
P or N (A/T model) ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON Neutral (M/T model)
Shift lever: Except above OFF
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL ● Engine: After warming up, idle (Forward direction)
the engine Steering wheel is turned. ON
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON  OFF  ON ON  OFF  ON
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan is operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW the engine Heater fan is not operating OFF
● Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
● Shift lever: N
INJ PULSE-B1 ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 10 - 20 BTDC
● Shift lever: N
IGN TIMING ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25 - 45 BTDC
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
● Shift lever: N
PURG VOL C/V ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 20 - 30%
● No-load
EC-83
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]

A
● Engine: After warming up Idle 5 - 5CA
● Shift lever: N
INT/V TIM (B1) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm Approx. 0 - 20CA
quickly EC
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
● Shift lever: N C
INT/V SOL (B1) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 60%
quickly
● No-load
Idle OFF D
VIAS S/V ● Engine: After warming up More than 5,000 rpm ON
E
AIR COND RLY ● Engine: After warming up, idle Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates)
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
F
● Engine running or cranking ON
FUEL PUMP RLY
● Except above conditions OFF
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON G
Engine coolant temperature is 94C
OFF
(201F) or less
● Engine: After warming up, idle Engine coolant temperature is H
the engine between 95C (203F) and 104C LOW
COOLING FAN (219F)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is 105C I
HIGH
(221F) or more
● Engine: After warming up
HO2S1 HTR (B1)*1 Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
● J
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80C
O2SEN HTR DTY*1 (176F) Approx. 50% K
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 0V
Engine: Idle L
AC PRESS SEN ●
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 1.0 - 4.0V
● Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as the
VEH SPEED SE*2
SULT-II value. CONSULT-II value M
The preset vehicle speed is dis-

SET VHCL SPD*2 ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
played.
CRUISE switch: Depressed ON
MAIN SW*2 ● Ignition switch: ON CRUISE switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Depressed ON
CANCEL SW*2 ● Ignition switch: ON CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACC ACCEL/RES switch: Depressed ON
SW* 2 ● Ignition switch: ON ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF
COAST/SET switch: Depressed ON
SET SW*2 ● Ignition switch: ON COAST/SET switch: Released OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW1*2 ● Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
EC-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
BRAKE SW2*2 ● Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
CRUISE switch is depressed at first
CRUISE LAMP*2 ● Ignition switch: ON ON  OFF
time  second time
● CRUISE switch: ON SET switch pressed ON
● When vehicle speed is between 40
km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
SET LAMP*2 MPH) (Except for Middle East)
● When vehicle speed is between 40 ASCD control is canceled OFF
km/h (25 MPH) and 160 km/h
(100 MPH) (For Middle East)
CAN COMM*3 OK
CAN CIRC 1*3 OK
CAN CIRC 2* 3 OK
CAN CIRC 3* 3
● Ignition switch: ON UNKWN
CAN CIRC 4* 3 UNKWN
CAN CIRC 5* 3 UNKWN

*2: Models with ASCD system.
*3: For A/T models.
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode EBS00FXN
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelerator
pedal with the ignition switch “ON” and with selector lever in “D” position (A/T models) or with shift lever in “1st”
position (M/T models).
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise after
“CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
EC-85
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[QR]
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
A
EC
PBIB0913E
EC-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE [QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
Description EBS00FXO
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode of
CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI- TOR
(SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in “DATA
MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or more
malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition EBS00FXP
● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)

● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2 , 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30C (68 - 86F)
● Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95C (167 - 203F)
● Transmission: Warmed-up*1
● Electrical load: Not applied*2
● Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T models with CONSULT-II, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle
until “FLUID TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60C (140F).
For A/T models without CONSUT-II and M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature,
drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Steering wheel is straight ahead.
Inspection Procedure EBS00FXQ
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-45, "Basic Inspection" .
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-
B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-85, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF601Z
EC-87
VALUE [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FXR
EC
SEF613ZD
EC-88
VALUE [QR]
SEF768Z
EC-89
VALUE [QR]
EC
SEF615ZA
EC-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[QR]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
Description EBS00FXS
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to
normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's complaint often do
not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occurrences is poor electrical
connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit
checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific problem area.
Common I/I Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0” or “[1t]”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the problem area.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FXT
1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-34, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION" .
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.

Refer to GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “CIRCUIT INSPECTION”,
“Ground Inspection”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION
TESTS”.
OK or NG
EC-91
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
[QR]
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM PFP:24110
A
Wiring Diagram EBS00FXU
EC
TBWA0136E
EC-92
[QR]
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00FXV
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
Counter current BATTERY VOLTAGE
12 G/W [Ignition switch “ON”]
return (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0 - 1.0V
● For 3 seconds after turning ignition switch “OFF”
ECM relay
20 W/G [Ignition switch “OFF”]
(Self shut-off)
● 3 seconds passed after turning ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
“OFF” (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “OFF”] 0V

42 B/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
59 B/W
60 B/W [Engine is running]
106 B/Y ECM ground Engine ground
● Idle speed
108 B/Y
109 W Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
111 W ECM (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FXW
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 8.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and then “ON”.

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 42 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0535E
EC-93
[QR]
A
● Harness connectors M61, F41
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 EC
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
C
>> Repair harness or connectors.
4. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I D

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 59, 60, 106, 108 and engine ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
F
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
H
5. CHECK POWER SUPPLY-II
1. Disconnect ECM relay.
I
L
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 6 and ground with
CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0493E
OK or NG M
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
SEF420X
EC-94
[QR]

● 10A fuse
● 20A fuse
● Harness connectors E60, F36
● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 20 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> Go to EC-184, "DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL" .
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals, 109, 111 and ground with
Voltage: After turning ignition switch “OFF”, battery
voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
drop approximately 0V.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
PBIB0536E
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 9.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 11.
EC-95
[QR]
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
A
EC
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with E

PBIB0493E
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
G
Check the following. SEF860T

I
● Harness or connectors E60, F36
● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and 10A fuse
J
11. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM RELAY AND ECM FOR OPEN AND SHORT
K
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and ECM relay terminals as follows.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. L
ECM terminal ECM relay terminal

12 7 M
109, 111 5

or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK ECM RELAY
Refer to EC-94, "Component Inspection" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace ECM relay.
EC-96
[QR]
13. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 59, 60, 106, 108 and engine ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00FXX
ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
Condition Continuity
12V direct current supply between
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
OFF No
3. If NG, replace ECM relay.
PBIB0077E
EC-97
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
[QR]
DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
A
Description EBS00G94
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- tiplex
communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units EC
are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other control units during operation
(not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN
L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. C
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G95
D
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
● ECM cannot communicate to other control E
U1000 CAN communication unit. ● Harness or connectors
1000 line ● ECM cannot communicate for more than the (CAN communication line is open or
specified time. shorted)
F
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G96

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. G
3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-97, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-98
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G97
TBWA0157E
EC-99
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G98

2. Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. EC
3. Print out the CONSULT-II screen.
>> Go to LAN-4, "CAN SYSTEM" .

PBIB0942E
G
EC-100
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER
[QR]
DTC P0031, P0032 HO2S1 HEATER PFP:22690
Description EBS00FY9
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine speed and
engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine is started.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00FYA
Specification data are reference values.

● Engine: After warm up
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80C
O2SEN HTR DTY (176F) Approx. 50%
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00FYB
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
2 P/L
heater
PBIB0519E

● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm. (11 - 14V)
EC-101
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FYC
A
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
The current amperage in the heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal ● Harness or connectors EC
P0031 0031 Heated oxygen sensor 1 range. (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is
heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to open or shorted.)
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1
● Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater
heater.) C
The current amperage in the heated oxygen
sensor 1 heater circuit is out of the normal ● Harness or connectors
P0032 0032 Heated oxygen sensor 1 range. (The heated oxygen sensor 1 heater circuit is D
heater control circuit high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to shorted.)
ECM through the heated oxygen sensor 1
heater.) ● Heater oxygen sensor 1 heater
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00FYD

E
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. F
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5V and 16V at
idle. G
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. H
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT-II.
4. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed. I
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-101, "Diagnostic Procedure"

. J
WITHOUT CONSULT-II L
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF058Y
M
3. Start engine and run it for at least 6 seconds at idle speed.
5. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.
6. If DTC is detected, go to EC-101, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
EC-102
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FYE
TBWA0060E
EC-103
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FYF
1. CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. EC
4. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 4 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester. F
PBIB0943E

OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
H
I
Check the following. PBIB0541E J
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E103
● 10A fuse K
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse
L
3. CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

M
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 2 and HO2S1 terminal 1. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-104
[QR]
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00FYG
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOT 1 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance

1 and 4 2.3 - 4.3  at 25C (77F)
2 and 3, 4 
3 and 1, 2, 4 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust
system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool
J-43897- 18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize
lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00FYH
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Refer to EM-22, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST" .
PBIB0542E
EC-105
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
A
Component Description EBS00FYI
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures
the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake flow. It EC
consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from the ECM.
The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a certain amount.
The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the
intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss. C
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the
temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change. D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00FYJ

E

SEC266C
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION F
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 1.0 - 1.5V
MAS A/F SE-B1 G
● Shift lever: N 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.6 - 2.0V
● No-load
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00FYK H

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- I
TER-
WIRE J
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.1 - 1.5V K
● Idle speed
72 OR Mass air flow sensor [Engine is running]
L
[Engine is running] M
80 B/P Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FYL
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

● Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0102 low input sent to ECM. ● Intake air leaks
● Mass air flow sensor
P0103 Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0103 high input sent to ECM. ● Mass air flow sensor
EC-106
[QR]
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00FYM
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
10 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and wait 5 seconds at most.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y
3. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM.

With CONSULT-II
3. Wait at least 5 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-106, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If
DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
Without CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds.
EC-107
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FYN
A
EC
TBWA0055E
EC-108
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FYO
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?

P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check the following for connection.

● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
>> GO TO 4.
PBIB0925E
EC-109
[QR]
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
1. Disconnect MAF sensor harness connector.
EC
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminals 2, 4 and ground E

with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0495E
Terminal Voltage
F
2 Approximately 5V
4 Battery voltage
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
H
Check the following. I

PBIB0076E
● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
J
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

K

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. L
3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 80. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
M
or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 72. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
EC-110
[QR]
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00FYP
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 72 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch “ON” (Engine stopped.) Approx. 1.0
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal
1.1 - 1.5
operating temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to nor-
1.6 - 2.0
mal operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.5 - 2.0 to Approx. 4.0
*: Check for liner voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000
rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
PBIB0537E
● Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
● Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
● Perform steps 2 and 3 again.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust.
6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
Removal and Installation EBS00FYQ

Refer to EM-15, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" .
EC-111
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
A
Component Description EBS00FYR
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor. The
sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM. EC
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise. C
E
<Reference data>
Intake air F
Voltage* V Resistance k SEC266C
temperature C (F)
25 (77) 3.32 1.9 - 2.1
80 (176) 1.23 0.31 - 0.37 G
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 84 (Intake
air temperature sensor) and body ground.
CAUTION: H
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the I
ground.
EBS00FYS
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause J
P0112 Intake air temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0112 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
P0113 Intake air temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is K
● Intake air temperature sensor
0113 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.
EBS00G82
DTC Confirmation Procedure L
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10
seconds before conducting the next test.
M
WITH CONSULT-II
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
EC-112
[QR]
EC-113
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FYU
EC
TBWA0056E
EC-114
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FYV
1. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor is
built-into) harness connector.
4. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminal 5 and ground.

Voltage: Approximately 5V PBIB0495E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PBIB0066E
2. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
>> INSPECTION END
EC-115
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00FYW
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR A

1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor terminals 3
and 5 under the following conditions.
EC
Intake air temperature C (F) Resistance k
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature C
sensor).
SEC266C
Removal and Installation EBS00FYX

SEF012P I
EC-116
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description EBS00FYY
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant
temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The
modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature input.
The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature
increases.
<Reference data>
SEF594K
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance k
10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 93 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION:
SEF012P
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FYZ

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P0117 Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0117 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
P0118 Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
0118 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch “ON” or
“START”.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40C (104F)
Engine coolant temper- More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80C (176F)
ature sensor circuit Start
40 - 80C (104 - 176F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates while engine
is running.
EC-117
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00FZ0
A
NOTE:
EC
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. C
D
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 5 seconds. G
2. Turn ignition switch OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.SEF058Y
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-117, "Diagnostic Procedure" . H
EC-118
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FZ1
TBWA0057E
EC-119
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FZ2
1. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness EC
connector.
C
4. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester. F
PBIB0496E
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors. H
I
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. PBIB0080E J
2. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. K
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR M

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-120
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00FZ3
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
<Reference data>
Engine coolant PBIB0081E

Voltage* V Resistance k
10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 93
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Removal and Installation EBS00FZ4
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SEF012P

Refer to CO-21, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE" .
EC-121
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
DTC P0132 HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description EBS00FZ5
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It detects
the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the outside air. The EC
heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube made of ceramic zirconia.
The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1V in richer conditions
to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts C
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The ideal air-
fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
D
SEF463R
F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00FZ6 I
Specification data are reference values. SEF288D
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION J

HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V  Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
LEAN  RICH K
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00FZ7 L

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- M
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
92 G/W Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition 0 - Approximately 1.0V (Periodi-
cally change)
EC-122
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FZ8
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxygen
sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.
SEF301UA
P0132 Heated oxygen sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0132 circuit high voltage sent to ECM. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF174Y
3. Restart engine and let it idle for 25 seconds.

EC-123
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FZA
EC
TBWA0059E
EC-124
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FZB
1. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.

Tightening torque: 40 - 50 N·m (4.1 - 5.1 kg-m, 30 - 37 ft-lb)
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector. PBIB0925E

to Wiring Diagram.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 92 or HO2S1 terminal 2 and ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER

2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

1 Refer to EC-123, "Component Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-125
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00FZC
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 A

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT- II. EC
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
C
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow-
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
D
F
● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes SEF646Y G
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
H
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
I
SEF217YA
M
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
SEF648Y
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 92 [HO2S1 (B1) signal] and engine ground.
EC-126
DTC P0132 HO2S1
[QR]
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm constant
under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V more
than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V  0.6 - 1.0V  0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V  0.6 - 1.0V  0 - 0.3V  0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION:
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
PBIB0543E
Removal and Installation EBS00FZD

EC-127
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
DTC P0134 HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description EBS00FZE
D
SEF463R
F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00FZF I

HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V  Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
LEAN  RICH K
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00FZG L

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- M
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
cally change)
EC-128
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FZH
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is not
input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately 0.3V.
Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is within 200 to
400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks that this time is not
inordinately long.
SEF237U
P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0134 circuit no activity detected approx. 0.3V. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1
Overall Function Check EBS00FZI
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II, and select “HO2S1 (B1)”.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load.
4. Make sure that the indications do not remain in the range between
0.2 to 0.4V.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF646Y
under no load.
● The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 - 0.4V.
PBIB0543E
EC-129
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FZJ
EC
TBWA0059E
EC-130
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FZK
1. INSPECTION START

>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect HO2S1 harness connector. PBIB0925E
2. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or con-
nectors.

PBIB0943E
to Wiring Diagram.
to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-131
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
A
>> INSPECTION END EC
Component Inspection EBS00FZL
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 C

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT- D
II.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow- E
ing steps.
F
H
● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
SEF646Y
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds.
I
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.

J
L
SEF217YA
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
SEF648Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC-132
DTC P0134 HO2S1
[QR]
under no load.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V  0.6 - 1.0V  0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V  0.6 - 1.0V  0 - 0.3V  0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION:
one.
PBIB0543E
Removal and Installation EBS00FZM

EC-133
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
[QR]
DTC P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FZN
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical
mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensor 1. The ECM calculates the EC
necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the ECM judges
the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C
Heated oxygen sensors 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas Fuel injection
Fuel injectors
D
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) control
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
● Intake air leaks
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Injectors F
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
● Exhaust gas leaks
P0171 ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
0171 ● Incorrect fuel pressure
Fuel injection system too lean large.
● Lack of fuel G
(The mixture ratio is too lean.)
● Incorrect PCV hose connection
H
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00FZO
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at I
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSUTL-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- SULT-
II.
K
4. Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
6. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. L
The 1st trip DTC P0171 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-134, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
M
7. If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system
has a malfunction, too.
8. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go
to EC-134, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine does not start, check
exhaust and intake air leak visually.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. SEF215Z
EC-134
[QR]
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and
run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn
“ON”.
6. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”. Refer
to EC-37 .
Make sure DTC 0102 is detected.
7. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”
memory. Refer to EC-37 .
8. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
9. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”. Refer to EC-37 .
The 1st trip DTC 0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-134, "Diag- nostic
PBIB0495E
Procedure" .
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-134, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine
does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
EC-135
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FZP
EC
TBWA0063E
EC-136
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FZQ
1. CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE

1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. SEF099P
2. Check PCV hose connection. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector.
to Wiring Diagram.
to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-31, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.7 kg/cm2 , 51 psi)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the construction of “FUEL PRESSURE CHECK”.
EC-137
[QR]
A
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 80 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
EC
1.1 - 1.5V: at idling
1.6 - 2.0V: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine
grounds. Refer to EC-103, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . D
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS

E
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. F
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
G
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. J
2. Listen to each injector operating sound. PBIB0133E
Clicking noise should be heard.

K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. MEC703B
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-336 .
EC-138
[QR]
7. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
4. Remove injector gallery assembly. Refer to EM-30, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
The injector harness connectors should remain connected.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each injector.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds. Make sure that fuel sprays out
from injectors.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each injector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace injectors from which fuel does not spray out.
Always replace O-ring with new ones.

SEF595Q
>> INSPECTION END
EC-139
[QR]
DTC P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION PFP:16600
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FZR
With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the theoretical
mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the heated oxygen sensors 1. The ECM calculates the EC
necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios.
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the ECM judges
the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and light up the MIL (2 trip detection logic). C
Heated oxygen sensors 1

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Fuel injection control Fuel injectors
D
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Fuel injection system does not operate properly. ● Injectors
P0172 Fuel injection system too rich ● The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too ● Exhaust gas leaks F
0172 large.
● Incorrect fuel pressure
(The mixture ratio is too rich.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00FZS G
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at H
WITH CONSULT-II
1.
Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. I
2.
Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds.
3.
Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CON- SULT-
II. J
4.
Clear the self-learning control coefficient by touching “CLEAR”.
5.
Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
6.
Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes. K
The 1st trip DTC P0172 should be detected at this stage, if a
malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-140, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
7.
If it is difficult to start engine at step 6, the fuel injection system L
has a malfunction, too.
8.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
If engine starts, go to EC-140, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine M
does not start, remove ignition plugs and check for fouling, etc.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. SEF215Z
EC-140
[QR]
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Then restart and
run engine for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
4. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
“ON”.
6. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”. Refer
to EC-37 .
Make sure DTC 0102 is detected.
7. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”
memory. Refer to EC-37 .
8. Start engine again and let it idle for at least 10 minutes.
9. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)”. Refer to EC-37 .
The 1st trip DTC 0171 should be detected at this stage, if a malfunction exists. If so, go to EC-140, "Diag- nostic
PBIB0495E
Procedure" .
10. If it is difficult to start engine at step 8, the fuel injection system has a malfunction.
11. Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. If engine starts, go to EC-140, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If engine
does not start, check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
EC-141
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00FZT
EC
TBWA0063E
EC-142
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00FZU
1. CHECK EXHAUST AIR LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust air leak before three way catalyst. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK SEF099P
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Disconnect corresponding heated oxygen sensor 1 (HO2S1) harness connector.
to Wiring Diagram.
to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL PRESSURE

2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-31, "FUEL PRESSURE CHECK" .
At idling: 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.7 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Follow the construction of “FUEL PRESSURE CHECK”.
EC-143
[QR]
A
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 80 (Mass air flow sensor signal) and ground.
EC
1.1 - 1.5V: at idling
1.6 - 2.0V: at 2,500 rpm
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or engine
grounds. Refer to EC-103, "DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR" . D
6. CHECK FUNCTION OF INJECTORS

E
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II. F
G
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
J
2. Listen to each injector operating sound. PBIB0133E

K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
MEC703B
NG >> Perform trouble diagnosis for “INJECTORS”, EC-336 .
EC-144
[QR]
7. CHECK INJECTOR
1. Remove injector assembly. Refer to EM-30, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" .
Keep fuel hose and all injectors connected to injector gallery.
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect injector harness connectors.
The injector harness connectors should remain connected.
4. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from injector.
OK or NG
OK (Does not drip.)>>GO TO 8.
NG (Drips.)>>Replace the injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-145
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00FZV
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to the EC
throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind
of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position into output
voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addition, these C
sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed
the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle
of the throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle
D
control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode E
Specification data are reference values. EBS00FZW
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION PBIB0145E SPECIFICATION

F
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN2 G
D (A/T model) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T model)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value H

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. EBS00G1X
CAUTION:
I
J
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running] K
● Idle speed
L
65 R Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
M

73 W Throttle position sensor 1

● Gear position is D” (A/T model)

74 G Throttle position sensor 2
EC-146
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00FZX
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.
● Harness or connector
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P0221 circuit range/performance compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 and shorted.)
0221 problem TP sensor 2. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
The ECM regulates an opening speed of approx. 5 seconds to an opening of 10 degrees. So, the
acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00FZY
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-147
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
EC
TBWA0182E
EC-148
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00BGN

>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. PBIB0925E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
PBIB0497E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in
harness or connectors.
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between electric throttle control actuator terminal 5 and engine ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-149
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 73 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM terminal
74 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. EC
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. D
5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
E
2. Disconnect joint connector-4.
3. Check the following. F
– Continuity between joint connector-4 terminal 1 and engine ground

– Joint connector-4
G
(Refer to PG-28, "Harness Layout" .)
Continuity should exist. H
5. Then reconnect joint connector-4.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

J

K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
L
7. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1.
Replace the electric throttle control actuator. M
2.
Perform EC-28, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" .
3.
Perform EC-28, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00GPK
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
EC-150
DTC P0221 TP SENSOR
[QR]
4. Set selector lever to “D” position (A/T models) or “1st” position (M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 73 (TP sensor 1), 74 (TP
sensor 2) and engine ground under the following conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage

73 Fully released More than 0.36V
(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
74 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next step.
8. Perform EC-28, "Idle Air Volume Learning" .
Remove and Installation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PBIB0559E EBS00BGP
Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" .
EC-151
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00GO0

D
Specification data are reference values. EBS00G04

F
(Engine stopped)
G
1st (M/T model)
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. EBS00GNZ
CAUTION:
I
J
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
● Idle speed
L
M

73 W Throttle position sensor 1
P0222 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 is ● Harness or connectors
0222 circuit low input sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 is
● Electric throttle control actuator
0223 circuit high input sent to ECM.
(TP sensor 1)
EC-152
[QR]
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-153
[QR]
EC
TBWA0178E
EC-154
[QR]

>> GO TO 2.


PBIB0497E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-155
[QR]
A
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 73 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. E
F
G

4. Also check harness for short to power. H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

L
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.

2. Perform EC-28, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . M
>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00GPE

EC-156
[QR]


ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PBIB0559E EBS00GPF
EC-157
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0226 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description EBS00G0B
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the
accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position EC
and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. C
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from D
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00BGR
F
PBIB0146E

G
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.15 - 0.97V H

Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
I
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00BGS
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. J
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. K
TER-
WIRE
COLOR L
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed M
Accelerator pedal position
64 OR/L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 2.5V
sensor 2 power supply
75 R/L
sensor 1 [Ignition switch “ON”]

76 W/B

86 L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
sensor 2 ground
EC-158
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G0D
● Harness or connector
Accelerator pedal position Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P0226 sensor circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from APP sensor 1 shorted.)
0226 mance problem and APP sensor 2. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 and 2
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G0E
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-159
[QR]
EC
TBWA0185E
EC-160
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00BGW

>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK APP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness PBIB0925E
connector.
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 4, 6 and ground with

PBIB0498E
APP sensor terminal Voltage (V)
4 Approximately 2.5
6 Approximately 5
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
Check the following. PBIB0560E

● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
EC-161
[QR]
4. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
2. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1, 3 and engine ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D
Check the following. E

● Joint connector-1 (LHD models)
F
● Joint connector-2 (RHD models except for South Africa)
G
6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
H
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 75 and APP sensor terminal 5, ECM terminal 76 and APP sensor
terminal 2.
I

J
or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. K
NG >> GO TO 7.

L
M
8. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
EC-162
[QR]
9. REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.

>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00BGX
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

4. Check voltage between ECM terminals 75 (APP sensor 1 signal), 76
(APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.

75 Fully released 0.41 - 0.71V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed More than 3.67V

5. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to next step.

PBIB0561E
Remove and Installation EBS00BGY
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" .
EC-163
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0227, P0228 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description EBS00G0J
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00GOU
F
PBIB0146E

G
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON H
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GOV
I
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- J
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) K
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
58 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V L
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch “ON”] M
75 R/L
More than 3.9V
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G0L
P0227 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP ● Harness or connectors
0227 sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0228 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
0228 sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM.
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
EC-164
[QR]
FAIL-SAFE MODE
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G0M
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-165
[QR]
EC
TBWA0152E
EC-166
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G0O

>> GO TO 2.

connector.
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 6 and ground with

PBIB0498E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

EC-167
[QR]
A
2. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D

F
G
6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
H
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 75 and APP sensor terminal 5.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. I

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7. K

L
● Joint connector-2 (RHD models except for South Africa) M
8. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
EC-168
[QR]

>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00GPG

conditions.



PBIB0561E
Remove and Installation EBS00G0Q
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-169
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
A
Component Description EBS00G0R
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking
vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a voltage signal and EC
sent to the ECM.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G0S F
PBIB0512E
CAUTION:
G
TER- H
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
82 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V I
● Idle speed
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G0T
The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction. J
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
Name
K
P0327 Knock sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0327 low input sent to ECM.
P0328 Knock sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent
● Knock sensor L
0328 high input to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G0U
NOTE: M
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC-170
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-171
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G0V
EC
TBWA0064E
EC-172
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G0W
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 82 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 M.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590k [at 20C (68F)]
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 82 and knock sensor terminal 1. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity
PBIB0512E should exist.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.
EC-173
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
[QR]
A
Loose and retighten engine ground screws.
>> GO TO 5. EC
5. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

PBIB0925E
F
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00G0X
KNOCK SENSOR G
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more H
than 10 M.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590k [at 20C
I
(68F)] CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
J
Removal and Installation EBS00G0Y

K
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to EM-68, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . SEF478Y
EC-174
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
[QR]
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
Component Description EBS00G0Z
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder block rear
housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at the end of the
crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the
gap with the sensor change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the
engine revolution.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G10

PBIB0562E
● Tachometer: Connect
ENG SPEED· ● Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II Almost the same speed as the
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G11
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 3V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
PBIB0527E
62*1 Crankshaft position Approximately 3V

71*2 PU/R sensor (POS)
[Engine is running]
PBIB0528E
*1: Models without NVIS
*2: Models with NVIS
EC-175
[QR]
A
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is
not detected by the ECM during the first EC
few seconds of engine cranking.
● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft ● Harness or connectors
P0335 Crankshaft position
position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM (The sensor circuit is open or shorted) C
0335 sensor (POS) circuit
while the engine is running.
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is
● Signal plate
not in the normal pattern during engine running.
D
NOTE: E
TESTING CONDITION: F
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch “ON”.
WITH CONSULT-II G
with CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec- H
onds at idle speed.
. I
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
K
1. Crank engine at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”. SEF058Y

4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-175, "Diagnostic Procedure" . L
EC-176
[QR]
TBWA0140E
EC-177
[QR]
1. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS A

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. EC
>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

F
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector. PBIB0925E
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”. J

3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1 and ground
PBIB0512E
Voltage: Battery voltage K

OK or NG
L
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
M

● Harness for open or short between ECM and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and crankshaft position sensor (POS)
EC-178
[QR]
4. CHECK CKP (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 (Models without NATS), 71 (Models with NATS) and CKP
sensor (POS) terminal 2.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
7. CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-179
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00G16
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS) A

1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor. EC
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
C
PBIB0563E E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance  [at 25C (77F)] F

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or 
G
2 (+) - 3 (-)
Removal and Installation EBS00G17 I

CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EM-68, "CYLINDER BLOCK" . PBIB0564E
EC-180
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
[QR]
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
Component Description EBS00G18
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction with intake
valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The crankshaft position
sensor (POS) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the
camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine
parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap
with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
CAUTION: PBIB0562E
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DAT (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO. A
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
63*1 Camshaft position

71*2 PU/R sensor (PHASE) PBIB0525E
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0526E
*1: Models with NVIS
*2: Models without NVIS
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G1A
EC-181
[QR]
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
for the first few seconds during engine
cranking. ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0340 Camshaft position sensor ● The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM ● Camshaft (Intake)
0340 (PHASE) circuit during engine running. ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-21 .)
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-21 .)
pattern during engine running.
● Dead (Weak) battery
EC-182
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G1B
A
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION: EC
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch “ON”.
WITH CONSULT-II C
D
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
. E
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5
seconds. F
.
G
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Crank engine at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”. SEF058Y H
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step. I
5. Start engine and maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
7. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. J
EC-183
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G1C
TBWA0141E
EC-184
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G1D
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

A
Turn ignition switch to “START” position.

Does the engine turn over? EC
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No C
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC-21, "STARTING SYSTEM" .)

D

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. E
>> GO TO 3.
F
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

I
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness PBIB0925E
connector.
J
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and M

PBIB0496E

or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0664E
EC-185
[QR]

● Harness for open or short between ECM and camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 63 (Models with NATS), 71 (Models without NATS) and CMP
sensor (PHASE) terminal 2.
3. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
8. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)

● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear
end or replace camshaft.
PBIB0565E
EC-186
[QR]
A
Component Inspection EBS00G1E
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE) C

2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connec-
tor.
D
3. Remove the sensor.
E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. G

PBIB0563E
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance  [at 25C (77F)]
1 (+) - 2 (-) H
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or 
2 (+) - 3 (-)
I
J
Removal and Installation EBS00G1F
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

Refer to EM-34, "CAMSHAFT" . PBIB0564E K
EC-187
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL
[QR]
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
Component Description EBS00G1G
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power
transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition coil primary
circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G1H
PBIB0509E
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO. A
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
21 BR Ignition signal No. 1

22 PU Ignition signal No. 2
PBIB0521E
23 L/R Ignition signal No. 3
24 GY/R Ignition signal No. 4 0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0522E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G1Q
(The ignition primary circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Power transistor unit built into ignition coil
The ignition signal in the primary circuit is ● Condenser
P0350 Ignition coil primary/ not sent to ECM during engine cranking or
0350 secondary circuit ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
running.
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
EC-188
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS005U5
A
NOTE:
● If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
● If DTC P0350 is displayed with DTC P0335 or P0340, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335 or EC
P0340 first. Refer to EC-172 or EC-178 .
WITH CONSULT-II
C
3. Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to D
“START” for at least 5 seconds.)
. E
G
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at least 5 seconds.)
H
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”.SEF058Y

I
EC-189
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G1K
TBWA0148E
EC-190
[QR]
EC
TBWA0179E
EC-191
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G1L
1. CHECK ENGINE START
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, and restart engine.

Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2. Yes
(Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 11. No
>> GO TO 3.
2. SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Search for circuit which does not produce a momentary engine speed
drop.
>> GO TO 11.
3. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch ON. PBIB0133E

2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 109, 111 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to EC-89, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM" .
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 12 and ground with CON- PBIB0580E
SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0136E
EC-192
[QR]
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
A
3. Disconnect ECM relay. EC
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and ECM relay
terminal 7. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 6.
in harness or connectors. E
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

F
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CON- PBIB0493E
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7. H

J
● 20A fuse
● Harness or connectors E61, F38 K
● Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
L
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
8. CHECK ECM RELAY

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
EC-193
[QR]
9. CHECK CONDENSER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and condenser
terminal 1, condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK CONDENSER

PBIB0509E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace condenser.
11. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 1 and ground with

PBIB0509E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
Check the following. SEF107S

● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM relay
● Harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM
EC-194
[QR]
13. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer
3. Also check harness for short to power. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. D
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 24 and ignition coil terminal 3. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 15.
H
15. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.
J
Refer to EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . K
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00G1M
L
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector. M
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance  [at 25C (77F)]

3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or 
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0
1 (+) - 2 (-)
CONDENSER
SEF371Q
EC-195
[QR]
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as 1 and 2.
Resistance: Above 1 M at 25C (77F)
Removal and Installation EBS00G1N
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

Refer to EM-27, "IGNITION COIL" . SEF124Y
EC-196
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
A
Component Description EBS00G1O
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the 4WD/ABS control unit (4WD models), ABS
actuator and electric unit (2WD models). The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM. EC
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G1P
C
CAUTION:
D
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
E
Approximately 2.3V
[Engine is running] F
63*1 ● Lift up the vehicle
81*2 L/B Vehicle speed sensor
● Vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25MPH)
G
PBIB0531E
*1: Models without NATS H
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00GOX
I
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted) J
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from ● Wheel sensor
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor combination meter is sent to ECM even
● 4WD/ABS control unit (4WD models)
0500 when vehicle is being driven. K
● ABS actuator and electric unit (2WD models)
● Combination meter
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G1R L

CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE: M
TESTING CONDITION:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If
a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
EC-197
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should exceed 10
km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position. If
NG, go to EC-197, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to following step.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-
onds.
ENG SPEED 1,750 - 6,000 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70C (158F)
B/FUEL SCHDL 6.4 - 31.8 msec
SEF196Y
Selector lever Suitable position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF

Overall Function Check EBS00G1S
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Lift up the vehicle.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed with combination meter.
The vehicle speed indication should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear
position.
EC-198
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G1T
LHD MODELS A
EC
TBWA0142E
EC-199
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
RHD MODELS
TBWA0143E
EC-200
DTC P0500 VSS
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G1U
1. CHECK DTC WITH 4WD/ABS CONTROL UNIT, ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTIRC UNIT
A
Check DTC with 4WD/ABS control unit (4WD models), ABS actuator and electric unit (2WD models). Refer
to BRC-32 or BRC-7 . EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated. C
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER

D
Check combination meter function.
Refer to DI-10, "Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode" (LHD models),
DI-27, "Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode" (RHD models).
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to combination meter.
F
3. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and combination meter harness connector. G
3. Check harness continuity following terminals.
H
Combination
Model ECM terminal
meter terminal
with NATS 49 81
LHD I
without NATS 49 63
with NATS 62 81
RHD without NATS 62 63 J
Refer to wiring diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. L
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART M

● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
Perform EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-201
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
[QR]
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR PFP:49763
Component Description EBS00G1V
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering

high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This sensor is a
potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output
voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the
electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening
angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the
increased load.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G1W

PBIB0502E
OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL ● Engine: After warming up, idle (Forward direction)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GOY
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Steering wheel is being turned. 0.5 - 4.0V
Power steering pressure
67 P
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel is not being turned.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G1Y
P0550 Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
0550 sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM. ● Power steering pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G1Z
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
EC-202
[QR]
A
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC
C
EC-203
[QR]
TBWA0150E
EC-204
[QR]

>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

F
1. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector. PBIB0925E

G
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 3 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester. J
PBIB0502E
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 3.
L
M
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. SEF509Y
2. Check harness continuity between PSP sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-205
[QR]
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 67 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK PSP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PSP sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 67 and ground under the
following conditions.
Condition Voltage
Steering wheel is being turned fully. Approximately 3.6V
Steering wheel is not being turned. Approximately 0.6V
PBIB0570E
EC-206
DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710
A
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and
output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine. EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G24 E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition SEF093X Possible cause
F
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605 B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning.
0605 Engine control module ● ECM
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. G
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected. H
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) I
Malfunction A
by the return spring.
Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A” first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed, perform J
“PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B”. If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION
B”, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
NOTE: K
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A L
With CONSULT-II
M
.
Without CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-207
DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
“ON”.
.
Without CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn “ON”.
SEF058Y

PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
“ON”.
4. Repeat step 3 procedure, 32 times.
.
Without CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
3. Repeat step 2 procedure, 32 times.

EC-208
DTC P0605 ECM
[QR]
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. EC
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. C
See EC-203 .
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
D
Without CONSULT-II
2. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” memory. Refer to EC-35, "How to Erase DTC E
( Without CONSULT-II)" .
3. Perform “DTC Confirmation Procedure”.
See EC-203 . F
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2. G
No >> INSPECTION END
2. REPLACE ECM H
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-35, "NATS (Nissan
Anti-theft System)" .
I
5. Perform EC-28, "Idle Air Volume Learning" . J
>> INSPECTION END K
EC-209
DTC P0650 MIL
[QR]
DTC P0650 MIL PFP:24810
Malfunction Indicator (MIL) is located on the instrument panel. When the ignition switch is turned ON without engine
running, MIL will light up. This is a bulb check. When the engine is started, MIL should go off. If MIL remains on, the
on board diagnostic system has detected an engine system malfunction.
● An excessively high voltage is sent to ECM
through the MIL circuit under the condition
that calls for MIL light up. ● Harness or connectors
P0650 Malfunction indicator lamp
(MIL circuit is open or shorted.)
0650 (MIL) control circuit ● An excessively low voltage is sent to ECM
through the MIL circuit under the condition ● MIL
that calls for MIL not to light up.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters in fail-safe mode when both DTC P0650 and another DTC, which calls for MIL to light up, are detected
at the same time.

MIL circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
Overall Function Check EBS00G8A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the MIL circuit. During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be
SEF058Y
confirmed.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Check that the MIL is illuminated.
3. If NG, go to EC-208, "Diagnostic Procedure" . If
OK, go to next step.
4. Start engine.
5. Check that the MIL is not illuminated.
EC-210
DTC P0650 MIL
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G2A
EC
TBWA0189E
EC-211
DTC P0650 MIL
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G2B
1. CHECK MIL POWER SUPPLY

2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
4. Check voltage between combination meter terminal 46 (LHD

models), 59 (RHD models) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1 PBIB0571E
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuse block (J/B) and combination meter
3. CHECK MIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 18 and combination meter terminal 62 (LHD models), 52 (RHD
models). Refer to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
EC-212
DTC P0650 MIL
[QR]
A
3. Check continuity under the following conditions. EC
CONDITION MODEL Terminal No. (Polarity) Continuity

LHD 62 (+) - 46 (–) C
1 RHD 52 (+) - 59 (–) Should exist.
LHD 46 (+) - 62 (–)

2 Should not exist. D
RHD 59 (+) - 52 (–)
PBIB0572E
OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-20, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" (LHD
models), DI-37, "Removal and Installation of Combination Meter" (RHD models).
Refer to EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . J
>> INSPECTION END

K
EC-213
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
Component Description EBS00G2C
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is
turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the air
fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air volume
learning value memory, etc.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G8B
SEF093X
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
Power supply for BATTERY VOLTAGE
66 W/L [Ignition switch “OFF”]
ECM (Buck-up) (11 - 14V)
P1065 ECM back up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
1065 ECM power supply circuit properly. open or shorted.]
● ECM
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
“ON”.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 four times.
.
WITHOUT CONSUT-II
2. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. SEF058Y
EC-214
[QR]
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 four times.
5. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. A
EC
EC-215
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G2F
TBWA0129E
EC-216
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G2G
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY A

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
SULT-II or tester.
C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. D
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F
● Harness connectors E60, F36 G

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
H
3. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I

OK or NG
J
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. L
M
See EC-210 .
Without CONSULT-II
2. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” memory. Refer to EC-35, "How to Erase DTC (
Without CONSULT-II)" .
See EC-210 .
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
EC-217
[QR]
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-35, "NATS
>> INSPECTION END
EC-218
DTC P1110 IVT CONTROL
[QR]
DTC P1110 IVT CONTROL PFP:23796
A
Description EBS00G7T
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed

Intake valve Intake valve timing control C
timing control solenoid valve
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake J
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant temperature.
Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve depending on driving
status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
K increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
PBIB0540E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G7U

L

M
● Engine: After warming up Idle 5 - 5CA
● Shift lever: N
INT/V TIM (B1) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm Approx. 0 - 20CA
quickly
● No-load
● Shift lever: N
INT/V SOL (B1) ● Air conditioner switch: OFF When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 60%
● No-load quickly
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G7V
CAUTION:
EC-219
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
Intake valve timing

control solenoid valve
PBIB0532E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G7W
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name Detecting condition Possible cause

● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
P1110 Intake valve timing control There is a gap between angle of target and ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
1110 performance phase-control angle degree. ● Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
portion of the camshaft
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when the malfunction is detected.
Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the solenoid valve and the valve control does not function
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G7X
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
NOTE:
● If DTC P1110 is displayed with DTC P1111, first perform trouble diagnosis for “DTC P1111”. See
EC-219 .
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10V and 16V at
idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
onds.
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

COOLANT TEMPS 70 - 105C (158 - 221F)
Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
SEF174Y
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
EC-220
[QR]
Overall Function Check EBS00G8C
A
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the intake valve timing control system. During this check, a DTC
might not be confirmed.
EC
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 seconds. C
4. Set the tester probe between ECM terminal 107 (IVT control solenoid valve signal) and ground.
D
6. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
E
shown below.
Conditions Voltage
BATTERY VOLTAGE F
At idle
(11 - 14V)
Approximately 4V - BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)

G
When revving engine up

to 2,000 rpm quickly H
PBIB0532E
PBIB0678E I
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G7Y
J
1. CHECK CRANKSAHFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-177, "Component Inspection" . K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). L
2. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
EC-221
[QR]
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)

● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft rear
end or replace camshaft.

PBIB0565E
For wiring diagram refer to CKP sensor (POS) EC-174 and CMP sensor (PHASE) EC-180 .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-222
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796
A
Component Description EBS00B7P
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF pulse

duty (ratio) signals from the ECM. EC
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil amount and
direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle. The
shorter pulse width retards valve angle. C
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve stops
oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control position.
D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor
Mode E
EBS00B7Q
PBIB0195E
● Shift lever: N
INT/V SOL (B1) G
● Air conditioner switch: OFF When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 60%
quickly
● No-load
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00B7R H

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- I
TER-
WIRE J
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition BATTERY VOLTAGE K
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
L
VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
Intake valve timing

control solenoid valve M
PBIB0532E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00B7S
P1111 Intake valve timing control An improper voltage is sent to the ECM (Intake valve timing control solenoid
1111 solenoid valve circuit through intake valve timing control solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
valve. ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
EC-223
VALVE [QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00B7T
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF”
and wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-224
VALVE [QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8D
EC
TBWA0070E
EC-225
VALVE [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00B7V
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCIUT

2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
PBIB0511E
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. DETECT MALFUNCTION PART
Check the harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and ECM relay.
PBIB0285E
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 107 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminal 2.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-226
VALVE [QR]
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
EC-227
VALVE [QR]
A
Component Inspection EBS00B7W
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals 1 and 2.
D
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 Approximately 8 at 20C (68F)
E

1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)
Removal and Installation EBS00B7X

G
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-44, "TIMING CHAIN" . PBIB0574E
H
EC-228
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
ACTUATOR [QR]
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119
Description EBS00G2V
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve
and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these
signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to
driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G2W
Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not
P1121 Electric throttle control B)
in specified range. ● Electric throttle control actuator
1121 actuator
ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.

C) This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection
logic.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction A or B is detected in the two consecutive trips, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and MIL lights
up.
When the malfunction C is detected even in the 1st trip, the ECM enters in fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.

The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position. The
Malfunction A
engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls. The
Malfunction C
engine can restart in “N” or “P” position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G2X
NOTE:
● Perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B” first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be con-
firmed, perform “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
If there is no problem on “PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B”, perform “PROCEDURE
FOR MALFUNCTION C”.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition witch “ON” and wait at least 1 second.
3. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T), “1st” position (M/T) and
wait at least 2 seconds.
“ON”.
.
EC-229
SEF058Y
ACTUATOR [QR]
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 1 second. A
2. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T models), “1st” position (M/T models) and wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. EC
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C C
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. D
3. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T), “1st” position (M/T) and
4. Shift selector lever to “N” or “P” position. E
F
Without CONSULT-II
H
2. Shift selector lever to “D” position (A/T models), “1st” position (M/T models)
SEF058Y and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Shift selector lever to “N” or “P” position.

4. Start engine and let it idle for 3 seconds. I
7. If DTC is detected, go to EC-225, "Diagnostic Procedure" . J
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY K

1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle M
control actuator inside.
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator. PBIB0518E

>> INSPECTION END
EC-230
FUNCTION [QR]
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119
Description EBS00G2Z
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121
or P1126. Refer to EC-224 or EC-233 .
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to
the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving
condition.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G8E

THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GOZ
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO. A
BATTERY VOLTAGE
113 W/B [Ignition switch “ON”]
relay power supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V

PBIB0533E
0 - 14V

PBIB0534E
EC-231
FUNCTION [QR]
EC-232
FUNCTION [QR]
DTC No.Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause A

Harness or connectors
(Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted)
P1122 1122 Electric throttle controlElectric throttle control function does not operate performance Electric
problemproperly.
throttle control actuator
EC
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up. C

ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return D
spring.

E
NOTE:
F
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. G
H
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
K
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. SEF058Y
4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. L
EC-233
FUNCTION [QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8F
TBWA0180E
EC-234
FUNCTION [QR]

>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. PBIB0925E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 115 and engine ground.
G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
I
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. J
2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay harness connector.
3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 2, 5 and

PBIB0505E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0575E
EC-235
FUNCTION [QR]

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and battery
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 113 and throttle control motor relay terminal 3. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness connectors E60, F36 (LHD models)
● Harness connectors E61, F38 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle control motor relay
7. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.

EC-236
FUNCTION [QR]
9. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.
C
Electric throttle control
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
114 Should exist D
6 116 Should not exist
114 Should not exist
3 E
116 Should exist
OK or NG PBIB0497E
OK >> GO TO 10. F
10. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY G

2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and H
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11. I
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
J
11. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

L
Refer to EC-237, "Component Inspection" . PBIB0518E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay. M
12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 15.
EC-237
FUNCTION [QR]
13. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between joint connector-4 terminal 1 and ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.

>> INSPECTION END

Remove and Installation EBS00G35
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

EC-238
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
RELAY [QR]
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119
A
Power supply for the Throttle Control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends an ON EC
signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned
OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
C

D
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G8G

E
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- F
TER- G
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “OFF”] H
113 W/B
relay power supply
(11 - 14V)
I
J
P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is stuck (Throttle control motor relay circuit is K
1124 relay circuit short ON. shorted)
● Throttle control motor relay
ECM detects a voltage of power source for throttle ● Harness or connectors L
P1126 Throttle control motor control motor is excessively low. (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
1126 relay circuit open This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection open)
logic. ● Throttle control motor relay
M
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the DTC P1124 is detected in the two consecutive trips, the ECM enters fail-safe mode) and the MIL lights up.
When the DTC P1126 is detected even in the 1st trip, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G8H
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-239
RELAY [QR]
With CONSULT-II
.
Without CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
EC-240
RELAY [QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8I
EC
TBWA0153E
EC-241
RELAY [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G8J
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY

2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay harness connector.
3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 2, 5 and

PBIB0505E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and battery
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

EC-242
RELAY [QR]
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. EC

OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

D

● Harness connectors E60, F36 E
F
7. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. H
NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay.

I
J
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00G8K
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY K

1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5.
L
Conditions Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes
No current supply No M
3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay.
PBIB0098E
EC-243
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
[QR]
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
Component Description EBS00G3C
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feedback to
the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving
condition.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GP0
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO. A
0 - 14V

PBIB0533E
0 - 14V

PBIB0534E
P1128 Throttle control motor ECM detects short both circuits between ECM and (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
1128 circuit short throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
EC-244
[QR]
NOTE:
EC-245
[QR]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and wait at least 2 seconds. A
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-241, "Diagnostic Procedure" . EC
WITHOUT CONSULT-II E
3. Turn ignition switch “OFF”, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn “ON”. F
G
EC-246
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8L
TBWA0186E
EC-247
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G3G

>> GO TO 2.
C
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. PBIB0925E
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 115 and engine ground.
G
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
I
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. J
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. K
Electric throttle control L

ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
114 Should exist
6 116 Should not exist M
114 Should not exist
3 116 Should exist
or NG PBIB0497E
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

Refer to EC-242, "Component Inspection" . OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 7.
EC-248
[QR]
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between joint connector-4 terminal 1 and ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00G3H
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. Check resistance between terminals 3 and 6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15  [at 25 C (77F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next step.
Remove and Installation EBS00G3I

PBIB0095E
EC-249
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
[QR]
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
A
System Description EBS00G3J
COOLING FAN CONTROL

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
C
Cooling fan
control Cooling fan relay(s)
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure
D
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure,
and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
E
OPERATION
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G3K

AIR COND SIG ● Engine: After warming up, idle Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
PBIB0910E Engine coolant temperature is 94C

OFF
(201F) or less
● Engine: After warming up, idle Engine coolant temperature is between
the engine LOW
COOLING FAN 95C (203F) and 104C (219F)
● Air conditioner switch: OFF Engine coolant temperature is 105C
HIGH
(221F) or more
EC-250
[QR]
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G3L
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
Cooling fan relay
27 LG/B
(High) [Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is high speed operating 0 - 1.0V

Cooling fan relay
37 L/Y
(Low) [Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● Cooling fan is operating
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G3M
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated.
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
● Cooling fan
● Cooling fan does not operate properly ● Radiator hose
(Overheat).
● Radiator
P1217 Engine over temperature ● Cooling fan system does not operate
● Radiator cap
1217 (Overheat) properly (Overheat).
● Water pump
● Engine coolant was not added to the
system using the proper filling method. ● Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-255, "Main 12
Causes of Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to MA-15, "Changing Engine
Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to MA-19, "Changing Engine Oil" .
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check EBS00G3N
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
EC-251
[QR]
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator. A
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the
proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-248, "Diagnostic
EC
Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled
the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-248,
C
"Diagnostic Procedure" .
D
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-

SULT-II. E
SEF621W
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-248, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
H
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. SEF646X I
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-248,
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer J
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-248,
3. Start engine. K
Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. Set temperature control lever to full cold position.
5. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”. L
6. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
7. Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating. SEF621W
Be careful not to overheat engine. M
8. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed. If

NG, go to EC-248, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If OK, go to the following step.
10. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
11. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
12. Connect 150 resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
SEC163BA
EC-252
[QR]
13. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher
speed than low speed.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
MEC475B
EC-253
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G3O
EC
TBWA0144E
EC-254
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G3P
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED
OPERATION With CONSULT-II

1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.

SULT-II.
PBIB0505E
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
251, "PROCEDURE A" .)
3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
SEF784Z
With CONSULT-II
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
SULT-II.
5. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed than
low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC- 253,
"PROCEDURE B" .)
SEF785Z
EC-255
[QR]
4. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position.
4. Turn air conditioner switch “ON”. C
5. Turn blower fan switch “ON”.
6. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.

OK or NG PBIB0505E
F
OK >> GO TO 5.
G
5. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION I
Without CONSULT-II SEC163BA

J
3. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch “OFF”.
K
4. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Connect 150 resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
6. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 oper- L
ate at higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. M
"PROCEDURE B" .)
MEC475B
EC-256
[QR]
6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure
drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Check the following for leak
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump SLC754A

Refer to CO-19, "WATER PUMP" .
7. CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Apply pressure to cap with a tester.

Radiator cap relief pressure: 59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar,
0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
8. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures. SLC755A
It should seat tightly.

2. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature: 82C (180F) [standard]
Valve lift: More than 8
mm/95C (0.31
in/203F)
3. Check if valve is closed at 5C (9F) below valve opening tem-
perature.
For details, refer to CO-21, "THERMOSTAT AND WATER CON- TROL
VALVE" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace thermostat
SLC343
9. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
EC-257
[QR]
10. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
A
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-255, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT C

2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1. D
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 5, 7 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. E
OK or NG
F
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
G
H
PBIB0577E I
● 10A fuse
● 40A fusible links J
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
K
EC-258
[QR]
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan
motor-2 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 3 and
cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan motor-1 terminal 4 and
body ground.
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 6 and
cooling fan motor-2 terminal 1, cooling fan motor-2 terminal 4 and
body ground.
Continuity should exist. PBIB0504E

or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 37 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer
to wiring diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace cooling fan relay.
EC-259
[QR]
7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

D
>> INSPECTION END
PROCEDURE B
E
1. CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3. F
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1,
3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. G

OK or NG H
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
I
J
Check the following. PBIB0251E K

● 10A fuse
● 40A fusible links L
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fusible links
M
EC-260
[QR]
3. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2,
cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7 and body ground.
5. Check harness continuity between the following;
cooling fan relay-3 terminal 7 and body ground.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 27 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3
terminal 2.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2, -3 and ECM
6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace cooling fan relays.
EC-261
[QR]
7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS
A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. EC
8. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT C

D
>> INSPECTION END
Main 12 Causes of Overheating EBS00G3Q
E
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page
OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser F
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-14, "Engine G
Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level See MA-15, "Changing
in reservoir tank and radi- Engine Coolant" . H
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa See CO-13, "Checking
(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 Radiator Cap" . I
kg/cm , 9 - 14 psi) (Limit)
2
ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See CO-9, "LEAK

CHECK" . J
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See CO-21, "THERMO-
lower radiator hoses STAT AND WATER CON-
TROL VALVE" , and CO- K
12, "RADIATOR" .
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-243 ).
L
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 — M

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving See MA-15, "Changing
reservoir tank and idling Engine Coolant" .
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See CO-9, "LEVEL
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank CHECK" .
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-53, "CYLINDER
gauge mum distortion (warping) HEAD" .
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-53, "CYLINDER
tons walls or piston HEAD" .
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-5, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
EC-262
[QR]
Component Inspection EBS00G3R
COOLING FAN RELAYS-1, -2 AND -3

Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes
No current supply No
If NG, replace relay.
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check SEF745U
operation.
Terminals
Speed (+) ()
Low 1 4
Cooling fan motor High 1, 2 3, 4
Cooling fan motor should operate.

If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
SEF734W
EC-263
[QR]
DTC P1223, P1224 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
A
Component Description EBS00G3S

D
Specification data are reference values. EBS00G3T

F
(Engine stopped)
G
1st (M/T model)
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. EBS00GP1
CAUTION:
I
J
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
● Idle speed
L
M

74 G Throttle position sensor 2
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G3U
P1223 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 is ● Harness or connectors
1223 circuit low input sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P1224 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 is
● Electric throttle control actuator
1224 circuit high input sent to ECM.
(TP sensor 2)
EC-264
[QR]
FAIL-SAFE MODE
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G3V
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-265
[QR]
EC
TBWA0181E
EC-266
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00GP2

>> GO TO 2.


PBIB0497E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-267
[QR]
A
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
F
G

4. Also check harness for short to power. H
OK or NG
I
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR J

OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

L

2. Perform EC-28, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" . M
>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00GPH

EC-268
[QR]


ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PBIB0559E EBS00GPI
EC-269
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[QR]
A

D
On Board Diagnosis Logic E
EBS00G41
PBIB0145E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
P1225 Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning value is ● Electric throttle control actuator
1225 performance problem excessively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)

G
NOTE:
H
TESTING CONDITION:
I
WITH CONSULT-II
J
5. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-264, "Diagnostic Procedure" K
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-270
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
[QR]
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the
housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

>> INSPECTION END


EC-271
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[QR]
A

D
On Board Diagnosis Logic E
EBS00G46
PBIB0145E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause F
P1226 Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning is not ● Electric throttle control actuator
1226 performance problem performed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
G
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 10 H
TESTING CONDITION:
I
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. J
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, 32 times. K
.
L
M
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
3. Repeat step 2, 32 times.

EC-272
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
[QR]
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and the
housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.

>> INSPECTION END


EC-273
[QR]
DTC P1227, P1228 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Component Description EBS00G4A
E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00GP5
F
PBIB0146E

G
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON H
I
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- J
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage) K
COLOR
L NO.
64 OR/L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 2.5V
L
76 W/B
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”] M

86 L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
sensor 2 ground
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G4C
These half-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.
P1227 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP ● Harness or connectors
1227 sensor 2 circuit low input sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P1228 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP
1228 sensor 2 circuit high input sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
(Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
EC-274
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G4D
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-275
[QR]
EC
TBWA0184E
EC-276
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G4F

>> GO TO 2.

connector.
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 4 and ground with

PBIB0498E
Voltage: Approximately 2.5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

EC-277
[QR]
A
2. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D

F
6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 76 and APP sensor terminal 2. H
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
NG >> GO TO 7.

K
L
M
8. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-278
[QR]
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00GPJ

conditions.


PBIB0561E
Remove and Installation EBS00G4H
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-279
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
[QR]
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:16119
A
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G4I

EC
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
C
(The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is shorted.)
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(MAF sensor circuit is shorted.)
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is D
shorted.)
(Absolute pressure sensor circuit is shorted.*)
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source for ● Electric throttle control actuator
E
1229 circuit short sensor is excessively low or high. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
(APP sensor 1)
F
● MAF sensor
● Refrigerant pressures sensor
● Absolute pressure sensor*
G
● ECM pin terminal
*: Models for Latin America and Mexico.
H
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode I

J
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at K
TESTING CONDITION:
L
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
SEF058Y

EC-280
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00BGM
TBWA0183E
EC-281
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G4L

>> GO TO 2.
C

F

G
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. J
PBIB0497E
OK or NG K
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 3.
L
PBIB0082E
EC-282
[QR]
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT

● Harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM terminal Sensor terminals Reference Wiring Diagram

Electric throttle control actuator terminal 1 EC-228
APP sensor terminal 6 EC-157
MAF sensor terminal 2 EC-105
65 Refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 EC-353
Absolute pressure sensor terminal 1
EC-311
(Models for Latin America and Mexico.)
● Joint connector-4
● ECM pin terminal.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK COMPONENTS

● Accelerator pedal position sensor (Refer to EC-160, "Component Inspection" .)
● Mass air flow sensor (Refer to EC-108, "Component Inspection" .)
● Refrigerant pressure sensor [Refer to ATC-18, "REFRIGERATION SYSTEM" (models with automatic air
conditioner) or MTC-18, "REFRIGERATION SYSTEM" (models with manual air conditioner).]
● Absolute pressure sensor (Refer to EC-310, "ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR" .)
(Models for Latin America and Mexico.)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning component.
5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Refer to EC-147, "Component Inspection" . OK or
NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.

>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END
EC-283
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
A
Component Description EBS00G4M
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each
button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines which EC
button is operated.
Refer to EC-385, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G4N E

PBIB0916E
● CRUISE switch pressed ON
MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON ● CRUISE switch released OFF
G
● CANCEL switch pressed ON
CANCEL ● Ignition switch: ON ● CANCEL switch released OFF
● ACCEL RES switch pressed ON H
RESUME/ACC SW ● Ignition switch: ON ● ACCEL RES switch released OFF
● COAST/SET switch pressed ON
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON I
● COAST/SET switch released OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G8R
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. J
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. K
TER-
WIRE
COLOR L
L NO.
[Engine is running]
M
● Idle speed
● ASCD steering switch is “OFF”. Approximately 4V

Approximately 0V
● CRUISE switch is “ON”.
Approximately 1V
● CANCEL switch is “ON”.
89 W/R ASCD steering switch
Approximately 2V
● SET/COAST switch is “ON”.
Approximately 3V
● RESUME/ACCEL switch is “ON”.
EC-284
[QR]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G4O
NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-203, "DTC P0605 ECM" .
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
● An excessively high voltage signal from the
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM.
● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD
P1564 (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
ASCD steering switch steering switch is out of the specified
1564 ● ASCD steering switch
range.
● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is ● ECM
stuck ON.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G4P
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Press “CRUISE” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and
5. Press “ACCEL/RES” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it
and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press “COAST/SET” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it
and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press “CANCEL” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II SEF058Y
3. Press “CRUISE” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press “ACCEL/RES” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press “COAST/SET” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press “CANCEL” switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
EC-285
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8S
LHD MODELS A
EC
TBWA0162E
EC-286
[QR]
RHD MODELS
TBWA0163E
EC-287
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G4R
1. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT A
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CAN-
CEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
C
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication

Pressed ON D
CUISE MAIN SW Released OFF
Pressed ON
E
COAST/SET SET SW Released OFF
Pressed ON
ACCEL/RES RESUME/ACC SW Released OFF F
Pressed ON
CANCEL CANCEL SW SEC006D
Released OFF
G
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 89 and ground with press- H
ing each button.
Switch Condition Voltage [V] I

Pressed Approx. 0.5
CRUISE Released Approx. 4.0
J
Pressed Approx. 2.0
COAST/SET Released Approx. 4.0
Pressed Approx. 3.0 K
ACCEL RES Released Approx. 4.0
Pressed Approx. 1.0
CANCEL L
Released Approx. 4.0
PBIB0854E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. M
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ASCD steering switch harness connector and ECM
harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD steering switch terminal 5
(LHD models), 2 (RHD models) and ECM terminal 58. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-288 PBIB0916E
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G4W
CAUTION: G
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at H
WITH CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION: I
Steps 3 and 4 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1. Start engine. J
3. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
K
VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)
L
If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition. M

Depress the brake pedal for more than five
Driving location seconds so as not to come off from the
above-mentioned condition.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 2 and 5 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
1. Start engine.
EC-289
[QR]
Vehicle speed More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)

4. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. If
1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-288, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
Vehicle speed More than 30 km/h (19 MPH)

Depress the brake pedal for more than five
Driving location seconds so as not to come off from the
above-mentioned condition.
EC-290
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8T
EC
TBWA0164E
EC-291
[QR]
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
A/T models
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is depress OFF
When brake pedal is fully released ON
M/T models
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed OFF
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released ON
Without CONSULT-II SEC011D

A/T models
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is depress Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is fully released Battery voltage
M/T models
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. PBIB0855E
NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 8.
EC-292
[QR]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
A
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
EC
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON C
E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 40 and ground under the fol-
SEC013D
lowing conditions. F
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V G
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
PBIB0856E
NG >> GO TO 13. J
EC-293
[QR]
3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground

under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC009D
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When clutch pedal is released Battery voltage
When clutch pedal is depressed Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. PBIB0857E

4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse
EC-294
[QR]
6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-293, "Component Inspection" E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. F
8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

G
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. H
K
SEC009D
Voltage: Battery voltage L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. M
NG >> GO TO 9.

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
EC-295
[QR]
10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 56 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Refer to EC-293, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT -II or tester.
PBIB0498E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
PBIB0117E
EC-296
[QR]
A
● 15A fuse EC
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
C
15. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
D
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16. G
Check the following. H

I
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
J
17. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-293, "Component Inspection" K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. L

M
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00G4Z
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

EC-297
[QR]
3. Check continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
When brake pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to BR-6,

"BRAKE PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH (FOR M/T MODELS)

2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. SEC023D
3. Check continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminals 1 and 2

When clutch pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When clutch pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD clutch switch installation, refer to CL-5,

"CLUTCH PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
STOP LAMP SWITCH

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. SEC024D
3. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under

the following conditions.
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to BR-6, "BRAKE

PEDAL" , and perform step 3 again.
PBIB0118E
EC-298
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR [QR]
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036
A
The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals, and detects vehicle speed for ASCD control. Vehicle speed signals are
input from combination meter and TCM separately. Signal from TCM is sent via CAN communication line. Refer to EC
EC-385, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
C
NOTE:
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000.
Refer to EC-95, "DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE" .
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500. D
Refer to EC-193, "DTC P0500 VSS"
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause E
(The combination meter circuit is open or
shorted.)
F
(The CAN communication line is open or
ECM detects a difference between two shorted.)
P1574
ASCD vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed signals is out of the G
1574 ● Combination meter
specified range.
● Wheel sensor
● TCM
H
● ECM
CAUTION: I
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at J
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test K
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. L
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH) for at least 5
seconds. M
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH) for at least 5 seconds. SEF058Y
3. Stop vehicle.
EC-299
SENSOR [QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8U
LHD MODELS
TBWA0166E
EC-300
SENSOR [QR]
RHD MODELS
A
EC
TBWA0167E
EC-301
SENSOR [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G8V
1. INSPECTION START
Which is the models A/T or M/T?

A/T or M/T
A/T >> GO TO 2.
M/T >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK DTC WITH TCM
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT-33, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
3. CHECK DTC WITH 4WD/ABS CONTROL UNIT, ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTIRC UNIT
Check DTC with 4WD/ABS control unit (4WD models), ABS actuator and electric unit (2WD models). Refer
to BRC-32 or BRC-7 .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
Check combination meter function.

Refer to DI-10, "Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode" (LHD models), DI-
27, "Meter/Gauge Operation and Odo/Trip Meter Segment Check in Diagnosis Mode" (RHD models).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to combination meter.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity following terminals.
Model Combination meter terminal ECM terminal

with NATS 49 81
LHD without NATS 49 63
with NATS 62 81
RHD without NATS 62 63

or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-302
SENSOR [QR]
A
● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter EC

C
Perform EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . D
>> INSPECTION END

E
EC-303
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1706 PNP SWITCH PFP:32006
When the gear position is “P” (A/T models only) or “N”, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is “ON”. ECM
detects the position because the continuity of the line (the “ON” signal) exists.

Shift lever:
P or N (A/T model) ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON Neutral (M/T model)
Shift lever: Except above OFF
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 0V
● Gear position is “P” or “N”.
A/T model
43 G/OR PNP switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Except the above gear position M/T model
Approximately 5V
P1706 Park/neutral position The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch [The park/neutral position (PNP) switch
1706 switch is not changed in the process of engine starting and circuit is open or shorted.]
driving. ● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
CAUTION:
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
EC-304
[QR]
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the follow- A
ing conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal

“N” and “P” position ON EC
Except the above position OFF
If NG, go to EC-303, "Diagnostic Procedure" . C

If OK, go to following step.
4. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. D
onds.
SEF212Y
E
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 3,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70C (158F)
B/FUEL SCHDL 3.0 - 31.8 msec F
G
.
Overall Function Check EBS00G59 H
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. During this check, a
SEF213Y
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
I
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 43 (PNP switch signal) J
and body ground under the following conditions.
Condition (Gear position) Voltage V (Known good data)

K
“P” (A/T models only) and “N” position Approx. 0
A/T models: Battery voltage
Except the above position
M/T: Approximately 5V
L
PBIB0578E
EC-305
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G5A
TBWA0072E
EC-306
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G5B
1. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector. EC
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and body ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 2.
E
F
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 43 and PNP switch terminal 1.
Continuity should exist. G
or NG
H
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH I

Refer to AT-133, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" (A/T models) or MT-12, "PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION
SWITCH" (M/T models).
J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.
K
Refer to EC-88, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . L
>> INSPECTION END

M
EC-307
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Description EBS00G5C
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This signal
is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G5D

BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G5E
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Brake pedal fully released Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully depressed (11 - 14V)
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00G5F
P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or
1805 Brake switch extremely long time while the vehicle is driving. shorted.)
● Stop lamp switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00G5G
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. SEF058Y
3. Erase the “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” memory. Refer to EC-35, "How to Erase DTC (
Without CONSULT-II)" .
EC-308
[QR]
5. Perform “Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)” with ECM. A
EC
EC-309
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G5H
TBWA0151E
EC-310
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G5I
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT A

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal. EC
Brake pedal Stop lamp

Fully released Not illuminated C
Depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
D
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E

F
I
2. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground
PBIB0498E
Voltage: Battery voltage J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. K

M
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
EC-311
[QR]

4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and stop lamp
switch terminal 2.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness connectors M61, M41
● Joint connector-2 (Models except for South Africa)
● Joint connector-3 (Models for South Africa)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00G5J
STOP LAMP SWITCH

PBIB0498E
EC-312
[QR]
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions. A
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
EC
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.
3. If NG, replace stop lamp switch.
C
PBIB0118E
E
EC-313
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:22365
Component Description EBS00G5K
The absolute pressure sensor detects ambient barometric pressure and

sends the voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure increases, the voltage
rises.
SEF052V
PBIB0629E
EC-314
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8X
EC
TBWA0160E
EC-315
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G5M
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 0.52 - 4.6V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.

>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect absolute pressure sensor harness connector. PBIB0925E

2. Check sensor harness connector for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or replace harness connector.
PBIB0948E
EC-316
[QR]
4. CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
2. Check voltage between absolute pressure sensor terminal 1 and
ground with CONSULT-II or tester. EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
D
E
Check the following. PBIB0079E F
● Harness connector M61, F41
● Harness for open or short between ECM and absolute pressure sensor
G
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT H
2. Check harness continuity between absolute pressure sensor terminal 3 and ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. I

3. Also check harness for short to power. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7. K

L
● Harness connector M61, F41
● Joint connector-2 (RHD models except for South Africa) M
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 88 and absolute pressure sensor terminal 2.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
EC-317
[QR]

● Harness connector M61, F41 (RHD models)
● Harness connector M62, F42 (LHD models)
10. CHECK ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace absolute pressure sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00G8Y

1. Remove absolute pressure sensor with its harness connector connected.
2. Install a vacuum pump to absolute pressure sensor.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON” and check output voltage between ECM
terminal 88 and engine ground under the following conditions.
Applied vacuum kPa (mmHg, inHg) Voltage

Not applied 3.2 - 4.8
-26.7 (-200, -7.87) 1.0 to 1.4 V lower than above value
CAUTION:
● Always calibrate the vacuum pump gauge when using it.
● Do not apply below 93.3 kPa (–700 mmHg, –27.56 inHg)
or over 101.3 kPa (760 mmHg, 29.92 inHg) of pressure.
4. If NG, replace absolute pressure sensor.
PBIB0919E
EC-318
HO2S1
[QR]
HO2S1 PFP:22690
A
Component Description EBS00G5O
D
SEF463R
F
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G5P I

HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm 0 - 0.3V  Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
LEAN  RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Changes more than 5 times dur- K
ing 10 seconds.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G5Q

L
CAUTION:
M
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
cally change)
EC-319
HO2S1
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G5R
TBWA0074E
EC-320
HO2S1
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G5S
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make
C
sure that the monitors fluctuate between LEAN and RICH more
than five times in 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH  LEAN  RICH D

2 times: RICH  LEAN  RICH  LEAN RICH
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. SEF820Y
G
2. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Set ECM in “Diagnostic test mode - II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor)”.
Refer to EC-38, "DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR" . H
4. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make sure
that the MIL comes ON more than five times in 10 seconds.
OK or NG I
NG >> GO TO 2.
J
2. INSPECTION START L
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. SAT652J
M
>> GO TO 3.
PBIB0925E
EC-321
HO2S1
[QR]
3. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect HO2S1 harness connector.

2. Check harness continuity between HO2S1 terminal 3 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
nectors.

PBIB0943E
to Wiring Diagram.
to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00G5T

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT- II.
EC-322
HO2S1
[QR]
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow- A
ing steps.
EC
D
● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes SEF646Y
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” 5 times in 10 seconds. E
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once. F

SEF217YA
K
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. L
SEF648Y
Without CONSULT-II M
under no load.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V  0.6 - 1.0V  0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V  0.6 - 1.0V  0 - 0.3V  0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION:
one.
PBIB0543E
EC-323
HO2S1
[QR]
Removal and Installation EBS00G5U

EC-324
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE [QR]
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920
A
Description EBS00G5V
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator EC
C
EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol- D
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position purge flow control ume control solenoid valve
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensors 1*
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
E
*: Models with three way catalyst

F
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP canister purge
volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the
valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is G
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the
EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION H
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF
duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is I
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the
greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
J
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G5W L

SEF337U
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION M
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
● Shift lever: N
PURG VOL C/V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 20 - 30%
● No-load
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G5X
CAUTION:
EC-325
VALVE [QR]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 10V
EVAP canister purge

13 P volume control solenoid
valve [Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm
PBIB0520E
EC-326
VALVE [QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G5Y
EC
TBWA0079E
EC-327
VALVE [QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G5Z

With CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”, and select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Change the valve opening percentage with touching “Qu” or “Qd” on

CONSULT-II screen, and check for vacuum existence at the EVAP
purge hose under the following conditions. PBIB0569E
Conditions Vacuum
At idle Should not exist.
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm. Should exist.
Without CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister.
4. Check for vacuum existence at the EVAP purge hose under the
Conditions Vacuum
At idle Should not exist.
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm. Should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

PBIB0676E

OK or NG
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
EC-328
VALVE [QR]
3. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
A
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection. Refer to
EC-381, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
C
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. D
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. E
H
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester. PBIB0944E
Voltage: Battery voltage I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. J

L

● Fuse and fuse block (J/B) connector E103 M
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse
EC-329
VALVE [QR]
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7. OK
(Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the valve
opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EC-327, "Component Inspection" . PBIB0569E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-330
VALVE [QR]
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve under the following conditions. EC
Condition Air passage continuity

(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B C
100.0% Yes
0.0% No
D
E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions. PBIB0149E
F
Air passage continuity

Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
G
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
H
Removal and Installation EBS00G61

I
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . PBIB0150E
J
EC-331
VIAS
[QR]
VIAS PFP:14956
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
VIAS control VIAS control solenoid valve
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed
PBIB0843E
When the engine is running at low or medium speed, the power valve is fully closed. Under this condition, the effective
suction port length is equivalent to the total length of the intake manifold collector's suction port including the intake
valve. This long suction port provides increased air intake which results in improved suction efficiency and higher
torque generation.
The surge tank and one-way valve are provided. When engine is running at high speed, the ECM sends the signal to the
VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and
therefore opens the power valve to two suction passages together in the collector.
Under this condition, the effective port length is equivalent to the length of the suction port provided indepen- dently for
each cylinder. This shortened port length results in enhanced engine output with reduced suction resistance under high
speeds.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Power Valve
The power valve is installed in intake manifold collector and used to
control the suction passage of the variable induction air control system. It
is set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power valve
actuator operated by the vacuum stored in the surge tank. The vacuum in
the surge tank is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valve.
EC-332
VIAS
PBIB0946E [QR]
VIAS Control Solenoid Valve
The VIAS control solenoid valve cuts the intake manifold vacuum A
signal for power valve control. It responds to ON/OFF signals from the
ECM. When the solenoid is off, the vacuum signal from the intake
manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the EC
plunger downward and feeds the vacuum signal to the power valve
actuator.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00GP8
E
Idle OFF
VIAS S/V ● Engine: After warming up More than 5,000 rpm ON
F
G
CAUTION:
H
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
I
VIAS control solenoid
25 GY/L
valve [Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V J
● Engine speed is above 5,000 rpm
EC-333
VIAS
[QR]
TBWA0159E
EC-334
VIAS
[QR]
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. EC
2. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
C
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and make F
sure that power valve actuator rod moves.
PBIB0844E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
PBIB0949E
2. Rev engine quickly up to above 5,000 rpm and make sure that power
valve actuator rod moves.
K
OK or NG
PBIB0949E
NG (With CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 2. NG
(Without CONSULT-II) >>GO TO 3.
EC-335
VIAS
[QR]
2. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve “ON” and “OFF”, and check
vacuum existence under the following conditions.
VIAS SOL VALVE Vacuum

ON Should exist.
OFF Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
PBIB0844E
NG >> GO TO 4.
3. CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator.
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Apply 12V of direct current between VIAS control solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2.
5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
Condition Vacuum
12V direct current supply Should exist.
No supply Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> Repair or replace power valve actuator.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

1. Stop engine. PBIB0845E
2. Check hoses and tubes between intake manifold and power valve
actuator for crack, clogging, improper connection or dis- connection.
Refer to EC-21, "Vacuum Hose Drawing" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair hoses or tubes.
SEF109L
EC-336
VIAS
[QR]
5. CHECK VACUUM TANK
A
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6. EC
NG >> Replace vacuum tank.
6. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT C

2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve harness connector.
D
4. Check voltage between terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II

or tester.
PBIB0947E H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. I
NG >> GO TO 7.

K

● Harness connectors E60, F36 L

● 10A fuse
M
● Harness continuity between fuse and VIAS control solenoid valve
8. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 25 and terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
EC-337
VIAS
[QR]
9. CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve.
>> INSPECTION END

VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT-II
3. Perform “VIAS SOL VALVE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity

VIAS SOL between A and B between A and C
VALVE
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
Operation takes less than 1 second.
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the following
PBIB0177E
conditions.
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity

Condition
between A and B between A and C
12V direct current supply
Yes No
between terminals 1 and 2
No supply No Yes
VACUUM TANK
1. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to vacuum tank.
2. Connect a vacuum pump to the port A of vacuum pump. MEC488B
EC-338
VIAS
[QR]
3. Apply vacuum and make sure that vacuum exists at the port B .
A
EC
Removal and Installation D

VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE EBS00G67
Refer to EM-17, "INTAKE MANIFOLD" . PBIB0846E
EC-339
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
INJECTOR CIRCUIT PFP:16600
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel
to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel
injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the
length of time the injector remains open. The ECM controls the injection
pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.

SEF375Z
● Shift lever: N
B/FUEL SCHDL ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 2.5 - 3.5 msec
● No-load
● Shift lever: N
INJ PULSE-B1 ● Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
● No-load
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GPA
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
101 R/B Injector No. 1

PBIB0529E
102 Y/B Injector No. 2
103 G/B Injector No. 3 BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 L/B Injector No. 4 (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIB0530E
EC-340
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G6B
EC
TBWA0082E
EC-341
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G6C
1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to “START”.

Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
PBIB0133E
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
OK or NG
MEC703B
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-342
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]
3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
E
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
PBIB0510E
Voltage: Battery voltage F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I


● Harness connectors F1, F101 J
● 10A fuse K
● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
>> Repair harness or connectors. L
5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

M
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 101, 102, 103, 104. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-343
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
[QR]

● Harness connectors F1, F101
● Harness for open or short between injector and ECM
7. CHECK INJECTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace injector.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00G6D
INJECTOR
1. Disconnect injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5 [at 20C (68F)]
Removal and Installation EBS00G6E
INJECTOR
Refer to EM-30, "FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE" . PBIB0181E
EC-344
START SIGNAL
[QR]
START SIGNAL PFP:48750
A
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00G6F

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION EC
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G6G C

CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- D
TER-
WIRE E
COLOR
L NO.
41 B/Y Start signal F
[Ignition switch “START”] 9 - 14V
EC-345
START SIGNAL
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G6H
TBWA0085E
EC-346
START SIGNAL
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G6I
1. INSPECTION START
A

Yes or No EC
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
C
With CONSULT-II
D
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II under the following conditions. E
Condition START SIGNAL

Ignition switch “ON” OFF
F
Ignition switch “START” ON
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END G
NG >> GO TO 4.
H
Without CONSULT-II PBIB0182E
Check voltage between ECM terminal 41 and ground under the fol- I
lowing conditions.
Condition Voltage J
Ignition switch “START” Battery voltage
Other positions Approximately 0V
OK or NG K
NG >> GO TO 4.
L
4. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

M
Turn ignition switch “OFF”, then turn it to “START”. PBIB0583E
Does starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> Refer to SC-12, "CHARGING SYSTEM" .
5. CHECK FUSE

2. Disconnect 10A fuse.
3. Check if 10A fuse is OK.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace 10A fuse.
EC-347
START SIGNAL
[QR]
6. CHECK START SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ignition switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 41 and fuse block (J/B), ignition switch and fuse block (J/B).
or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Harness connectors
● Fuse block (J/B) connectors M1, E102
● Harness for open or short between ignition switch and fuse block (J/B)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse block (J/B)
>> INSPECTION END
EC-348
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT PFP:17042
A
Description EBS00G6J
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed and cylinder number Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
C
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine startability. If
the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and cam- D
shaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the
engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and
prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the
ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump. E
Condition Fuel pump operation

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second. F
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops. G
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank. H
K
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor EBS00G6K
Mode
PBIB0513E L
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
● Engine running or cranking ON M
FUEL PUMP RLY
● Except above conditions OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00G6L
CAUTION:
EC-349
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON” 0 - 1.0V
29*2 B/P Fuel pump relay
● More than 1 seconds after turning ignition switch “ON”. (11 - 14V)
*1: Models without NATS
EC-350
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G6M
EC
TBWA0149E
EC-351
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G6N

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel hose for 1
second after ignition switch is turned “ON”.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel pump relay.
4. Check voltage between terminals 1, 5 and ground with CON-

SULT-II or tester.
PBIB0507E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1, B4
● Harness or connectors M17, B1
● 10A fuse
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay
EC-352
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
4. CHECK CONDENSER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
3. Check harness continuity between fuel pump relay terminal 3 and condenser terminal 1, condenser terminal 2 and EC
body ground.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
E
● Harness connectors B22, B128 (RHD models) F
● Harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and condenser
● Harness for open or short between condenser and body ground
G
6. CHECK CONDENSER
H

OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace condenser.
J
7. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
K
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness con-
nector.
3. Check harness continuity between
L
fuel pump relay terminal 3 and fuel pump terminal 5,
fuel pump terminal 3 and body ground.
M
or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART PBIB0506E

● Harness connectors B22, B128 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and fuel pump
● Harness for open or short between fuel pump and body ground
EC-353
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
9. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 10 (Models without NATS), 29 (Models with NATS) and fuel
pump relay terminal 2.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

● Harness connectors B1, M17 (LHD models)
● Harness connectors B2, M18 (RHD models)
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay
11. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace fuel pump relay.
12. CHECK FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace fuel pump.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00G6O
FUEL PUMP RELAY

Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 under the following conditions.
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals 1 and 2
EC-354
PBIB0098E
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
[QR]
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector. A
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
terminals 3 and 5.
EC
Resistance: Approximately 1.0 [at 25C (77F)]
CONDENSER E
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. PBIB0658E
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as 1 and 2. F

Resistance: Above 1 M at 25C (77F)
I
Removal and Installation EBS00G6P
FUEL PUMP
Refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUELSEF124Y
PUMP ASSEMBLY" . J
EC-355
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
[QR]
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136
Component Description EBS00G6Q
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the air
conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure
transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is
sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
PBIB0945E
SEF099X
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GPC
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Refrigerant pressure ● Warm-up condition

83 R/L sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are “ON”. 1.0 - 4.0V
EC-356
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G6S
EC
TBWA0088E
EC-357
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00G6T
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “ON”.
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch “OFF”. PBIB0659E

2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3 and

PBIB0945E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
Check the following. SEF479Y

● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
EC-358
[QR]
4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
2. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring
Diagram. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5. D

F
6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 83 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to H
Wiring Diagram.
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8. J
NG >> GO TO 7.

K
L
M

OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. NG
>> Repair or replace.
Removal and Installation EBS00G6U

Refer to ATC-131, "REFRIGERANT LINES" (Automatic air conditioner models), MTC-89, "REFRIGERANT
LINES" (Manual air conditioner models).
EC-359
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
[QR]
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00GB1

Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan is operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW the engine Heater fan is not operating OFF
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GB2
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
Electrical load signal ● Rear window defogger switch is “ON” (11 - 14V)
52 R/W (Rear window defogger
signal) [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Rear window defogger switch is “OFF” Approximately 0V

● Lighting switch is “2ND” position (11 - 14V)
Electrical load signal
53 R/Y
(Headlamp signal) [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Lighting switch is “OFF” Approximately 0V

● Heater fan control switch is “ON” Approximately 0V
55 LG/B Heater fan switch signal
Approximately 5V
● Heater fan control switch is “OFF”
EC-360
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00GB3
EC
TBWA0154E
EC-361
[QR]
TBWA0155E
EC-362
[QR]
EC
TBWA0156E
EC-363
[QR]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00GB4
1. INSPECTION START

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 5.
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
With CONSULT-II
2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II under the following conditions.
Condition LOAD SIGNAL

Rear window defogger switch “ON” ON
Rear window defogger switch “OFF” OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 8.
3. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II PBIB0103E


Lighting switch “ON” at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch “OFF” OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 12.
4. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION


Heater fan control switch “ON” ON
Heater fan control switch “OFF” OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 18.
EC-364 PBIB0103E
[QR]
5. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I
A
Without CONSULT-II
EC
Condition Voltage C
Rear window defogger switch “ON” BATTERY VOLTAGE
Rear window defogger switch “OFF” 0V
D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 8.
E
6. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

F
PBIB0660E
Without CONSULT-II
G
Condition Voltage H
Lighting switch “ON” at 2nd position BATTERY VOLTAGE
Lighting switch “OFF” 0V
I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 12.
J
7. CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION

K
PBIB0070E
Without CONSULT-II
L
Condition Voltage M
Heater fan control switch “ON” 0V
heater fan control switch “OFF” Approximately 5V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 18.
8. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION

1. Start engine. PBIB0661E
2. Turn “ON” the rear window defogger switch.
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up? Yes
or No
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> Refer to GW-10, "REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER" .
EC-365
[QR]
9. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and rear window defogger relay terminal 5. Refer to
wiring diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

● Harness connectors B1, M17
● Harness for open and short between ECM and harness connector M17
>> INSPECTION END
12. CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch “ON” at 2nd position.
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK (Models without xenon headlamp)>>GO TO 13.
OK (Models with xenon headlamp)>>GO TO 15.
NG >> Refer to LT-4, "HEADLAMP -CONVENTIONAL TYPE-" or LT-10, "HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE - "
.
EC-366
[QR]
13. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT A
1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect lighting switch harness connectors. EC
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 53 and lighting switch terminal 9, 10 under the following
conditions.
LHD models and for South Africa C
RHD models except for South Africa

G
PBIB0662E
K
PBIB0920E 1 Should exist
2 Should not exist
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 14. M

● Diode E123, E124
● Harness for open and short between ECM and lighting switch
EC-367
[QR]
15. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect HID relay LH.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 52 and HID relay LH terminal 3. Refer
to wiring diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16.

● Harness for open and short between ECM and HID relay LH
>> INSPECTION END
18. CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn “ON” the fan control switch.
3. Check the blower fan motor. Does the blower fan motor activate? Yes
or No
Yes (Models with auto A/C)>>GO TO 19. Yes
(Models with manual A/C)>>GO TO 21.
No >> Refer to ATC-32, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (Automatic air conditioner models), or MTC-30,
"TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" (Manual air conditioner models).
19. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect A/C AUTO AMP. harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 55 and A/C AUTO AMP. terminal 19. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> GO TO 20.
EC-368
[QR]
A
● Harness connectors M61, F41 (LHD models)
● Harness connectors M62, F42 (RHD models) EC
● Harness for open and short between ECM and A/C AUTO AMP.
C
21. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

D
1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect heater control panel harness connector. E
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 55 and heater control panel terminal 8. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
F
OK or NG G
OK >> GO TO 23.
NG >> GO TO 22.
H
I
● Harness connectors M61, F41 (LHD models)
● Harness connectors M62, F42 (RHD models)
● Harness for open and short between ECM and A/C AUTO AMP.
J

K

L
>> INSPECTION END
EC-369
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description EBS00G6Z
When depress on the brake pedal, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and
stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by
this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal)
Refer to EC-385, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.

SEC009D
BRAKE SW1 ● Brake pedal fully released ON
(ASCD brake switch) ● Ignition switch: ON ● Brake pedal depressed OFF
BRAKE SW2 ● Brake pedal fully released OFF

(stop lamp switch) ● Ignition switch: ON ● Brake pedal depressed ON
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00GPD
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released
● Brake pedal is depressed (11 - 14V)
● Brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
56 GY/L ASCD brake switch [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Brake pedal is fully released BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Clutch pedal is fully released (M/T models)
EC-370
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
Wiring Diagram EBS00G8Z
EC
TBWA0165E
EC-371
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
A/T models
When brake pedal is depress OFF
When brake pedal is fully released ON
M/T models
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed OFF
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released ON
Without CONSULT-II SEC011D

A/T models
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is depress Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is fully released Battery voltage
M/T models
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When clutch pedal or brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When clutch pedal and brake pedal are fully released Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. PBIB0855E
NG (M/T models) >>GO TO 3.
NG (A/T models) >>GO TO 8.
EC-372
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
A
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
EC
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON C
E
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 40 and ground under the fol-
SEC013D
lowing conditions. F
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V G
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
I
OK or NG
PBIB0856E
NG >> GO TO 13. J
EC-373
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
3. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT


under the following conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
SEC009D
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When clutch pedal is released Battery voltage
When clutch pedal is depressed Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ASCD clutch switch harness connector. PBIB0857E

4. Check voltage between ASCD clutch switch terminal 1 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD clutch switch and fuse
EC-374
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
6. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
2. Check harness continuity between ASCD clutch switch terminal 2 and ASCD brake switch terminal 1. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-293, "Component Inspection" E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace ASCD clutch switch. F
8. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

G
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. H
K
SEC009D
Voltage: Battery voltage L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10. M
NG >> GO TO 9.

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
EC-375
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
10. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 56 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
12. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

Refer to EC-293, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
13. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground with
CONSULT -II or tester.
PBIB0498E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
PBIB0117E
EC-376
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
[QR]
A
● 10A fuse EC
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
C
D
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 40 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. E

F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> GO TO 16. G
Check the following. H

I
J
Refer to EC-293, "Component Inspection" K

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. L

M
>> INSPECTION END
EC-377
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
ASCD INDICATOR PFP:24814
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and SET, and
is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when CRUISE switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD
system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
● CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
● SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD setting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer to EC-385, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
Specification data are reference value.

● CRUISE switch is depressed at
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON ON  OFF
first time  second time
● CRUISE switch: ON ● SET switch pressed ON
● When vehicle speed is
between 40 km/h (25 MPH)
and 144 km/h (89 MPH)
(Except for Middle East)
SET LAMP
● ASCD control is canceled OFF
between 40 km/h (25 MPH)
(For Middle East)
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
39 G/Y ASCD CRUISE lamp ● CRUISE switch is depressed at first time  second 
time BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● SET switch is “ON”. Approximately 0V
● ASCD control is operating.
47 L ASCD SET lamp
● ASCD control is not operating. (11 - 14V)
EC-378
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
LHD MODELS A
EC
TBWA0168E
EC-379
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
RHD MODELS
TBWA0169E
EC-380
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]

A
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.

EC
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● CRUISE switch is depressed at
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON ON  OFF
first time  second time
C
● CRUISE switch: ON ● SET switch pressed ON
SET LAMP between 40 km/h (25 MPH) ASCD control is canceled OFF
● D
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. E
2. CHECK ASCD INDICATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. G
4. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal Combination meter terminal H

22 (LHD models)
39
24 (RHD models)
24 (LHD models) I
47
22 (RHD models)

J
5. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. K
NG >> GO TO 3.

L
M
● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination meter
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors
EC-381
ASCD INDICATOR
[QR]
Check continuity under the following conditions.
CONDITION Model Combination meter terminal No. (Polarity) Continuity

22 (+) - 46 (–)
LHD 24 (+) - 46 (–)
1 Should exist.
22 (+) - 59 (–)
RHD 24 (+) - 59 (–)
46 (+) - 22 (–)
LHD 46 (+) - 24 (–)
2 Should not exist.
59 (+) - 22 (–)
RHD 59 (+) - 24 (–)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NGPBIB0917E
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS (LHD MODELS)" (LH, DI- 21,
"COMBINATION METERS (RHD MODELS)" .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-382
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[QR]
DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
A
EC
TBWA0158E
EC-383
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
[QR]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB0491E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel system. This
reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the vapor is
stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the engine is
operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the
flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as the
air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and idling.
EC-384
[QR]
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
A
EC
PBIB0909E
EC-385
[QR]
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B . Orally blow air through port A .
Check that air flows freely through port C .
2. Block port A . Orally blow air through port B .
Check that air flows freely through port C .
FUEL CHECK VALVE

1. Blow air through connector on fuel tank side.
A considerable resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow shouldPBIB0663E
be
directed toward the EVAP canister side.
2. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side.
Air flow should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
3. If fuel check valve is suspected of not properly functioning in
steps 1 and 2 above, replace it.
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF552Y
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar, SEF989X
2
0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm , 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: 6.0 to 3.3 kPa (0.060 to 0.033 bar,
0.061 to 0.034 kg/cm2 , 0.87 to 0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

SEF943S
EC-386
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[QR]
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
A
Description EBS00G7A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
G
PBIB0492E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake H
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air. The
ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
I
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the
reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not J
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go through
the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
K
M
Component Inspection EBS00G7B
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A SEF559A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A
strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over
valve inlet.
SEC137A
EC-387
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
[QR]
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277
EC-388
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[QR]
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) PFP:18930
A
System Description EBS00G7C

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD clutch switch (MT models) Clutch pedal operation
C
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation
Park/Neutral position (PNP) Electric throttle control
Gear position ASCD vehicle speed control actuator D
switch (AT models)
Combination meter Vehicle speed
TCM Power train revolution
E
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed F
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/ h (25
MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) (Except for Middle East), 160 km/h (100 MPH) (For Middle East).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed. G
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any malfunction
occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
SET OPERATION H
Press ASCD CRUISE switch (Main switch). (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH) (Except
for Middle East), 160 km/h (100 MPH) (For Middle East), press SET switch. (Then SET indica-
I
tor in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCEL OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the J
switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system. And then
ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION K
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
● CANCEL switch is depressed
L
● Brake pedal is depressed
● A/T selector lever is shifted to P or N position (A/T models)
M If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is depressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the switch is
released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is depressed after cancel operation other than depressing MAIN switch is
performed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet
● Brake pedal is released.
● Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N position (A/T models)
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH) (Except for Middle East)
EC-389
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[QR]
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 160 km/h (100 MPH) (For Middle East)
Component Description EBS00G7D
ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-277 .
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-284 .
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-284 .
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-284 .
Refer to EC-224 .
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-374 .
EC-390
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[QR]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
A
Fuel Pressure EBS00G7E
Fuel pressure at idle kPa (bar, kg/cm2 , psi) Approximately 350 (3.5, 3.7, 51)
EC
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing EBS00G7F
Target idle speed No-load*1 (in “P” or N” position) 70050 rpm

C
Air conditioner: ON In “P” or N” position 800 rpm or more
Ignition timing In “P” or N” position 155 BTDC
*1: Under the following conditions: D
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position E
Mass Air Flow Sensor EBS00G7H
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V) F

Output voltage at idle 1.1 - 1.5*V
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
G
Intake Air Temperature Sensor EBS00G7I
Temperature C (F) Resistance k

H
25 (77) 1.9 - 2.1
80 (176) 0.31 - 0.37
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EBS00G7J

I

J
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 K
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater EBS00G7K
Resistance [at 25C (77F)] 2.3 - 4.3 L

Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) EBS00G7M

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) EBS00G7N
M

Throttle Control Motor EBS00G7O
Resistance [at 25C (77F)] Approximately 1 - 15
Injector EBS00G7P
Resistance [at 20C (68F)] 13.5 - 17.5
Fuel Pump EBS00G7Q
Resistance [at 25C (77F)] Approximately 1.0
EC-391
INDEX FOR DTC
[YD]
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024
Alphabetical Index EBS00DB4
X: Applicable —: Not applicable

Items
DTC MIL illumination Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms)
ACCEL POS SENSOR P0120  EC-451
ACCEL POS SW (F/C) P1510  EC-519
BATTERY VOLTAGE P1660  EC-530
CAM POS SEN/CIR P0340  EC-475
COOLANT TEMP SEN P0115  EC-447
CR PRES SEN P0190  EC-459
CRANK POS SEN (TDC) P0335  EC-470
CYL1 INJECTOR P0201  EC-463
ECM 1 P1606  EC-524
ECM 10 P1107  EC-485
ECM 15 P1621 — EC-526
FUEL LEAK FNCTN P1305  EC-517
INJ DRIVE UNIT P1216  EC-490
INJ1 CORREC R P1301 — EC-513
MAS AIR FLOW SEN P0100  EC-442
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1617 — BL-137
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 — —
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.
OVER HEAT P1217  EC-497
P9·FUEL TEMP SEN P1180  EC-487
SUCTION CONT/V1 P1233  EC-508
SUCTION CONT/V2 P1234  EC-508
VEHICLE SPEED SEN P0500  EC-480
DTC No. Index EBS00DB5
X: Applicable —: Not applicable

Items
DTC MIL illumination Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen item)
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 — —
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SEN  EC-442
P0115 COOLANT TEMP SEN  EC-447
P0120 ACCEL POS SENSOR  EC-451
P0190 CR PRES SEN  EC-459
P0201 CYL1 INJECTOR  EC-463
EC-392
INDEX FOR DTC
[YD]
Items
DTC MIL illumination Reference page A
(CONSULT-II screen item)
EC
P0335 CRANK POS SEN (TDC)  EC-470
P0340 CAM POS SEN/CIR  EC-475
P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SEN  EC-480 C
P1107 ECM 10  EC-485
P1180 P9·FUEL TEMP SEN  EC-487
D
P1216 INJ DRIVE UNIT  EC-490
P1217 OVER HEAT  EC-497
P1233 SUCTION CONT/V1  EC-508 E
P1234 SUCTION CONT/V2  EC-508
P1301 INJ1 CORREC R — EC-513
P1302 INJ2 CORREC R — EC-513 F
G
P1305 FUEL LEAK FNCTN  EC-517
P1510 ACCEL POS SW (F/C)  EC-519
P1606 ECM 1  EC-524 H
P1610 - P1617 NATS MALFUNTION — BL-137
P1621 ECM 15 — EC-526
I
P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE  EC-530
EC-393
PRECAUTIONS
[YD]
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER" EBS00DB6
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER", used along with a
front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service
Manual.
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness
connectors.
Precautions EBS00DB7
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-

nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned off.
● Do not disassemble ECM.
SEF289H
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break). PBIB0378E
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to IC's.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys-
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise,
degraded operation of IC's, etc.
SEF291H
EC-394
PRECAUTIONS
[YD]
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
A
● Before replacing ECM, perform Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-420 .
EC
● If MIL illuminates or blinks irregularly when engine is run-

E
ning, water may have accumulated in fuel filter. Drain water
from fuel filter. If this does not correct the problem, MEF040D
perform specified trouble diagnostic procedures.
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform F
“DTC Confirmation Procedure” or “Overall Function
Check”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “ DTC Confirmation G
Procedure” if the repair is completed. The “Overall Func-
tion Check” should be a good result if the repair is com-
pleted.
H
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and SAT652J I
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's J
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
● Do not disconnect fuel supply pump harness connector K
with engine running.
● Do not disassemble fuel supply pump.
If NG, take proper action.
● Do not disassemble fuel injector. L
If NG, replace fuel injector.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous problems. M
● Do not shock or jar the crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
and the camshaft position sensor.
SEF348N
EC-395
PRECAUTIONS
[YD]
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when staring.
● Immediately after staring, do not rev up engine
unnecessar- ily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
SEF709Y
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standingwave
radio can be kept smaller.
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EBS00DB8
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

SEF708Y
● GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
● PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● GI-11, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES".
● GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
EC-396
[YD]
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
A
System Diagram EBS00DB9
EC
PBIB0901E
EC-397
[YD]
System Chart EBS00DBA
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)

● Accelerator pedal position sensor EDU, Fuel injectors and Suction control
Fuel injection control
● Accelerator pedal released position switch valve
● Common rail fuel pressure sensor EDU, Fuel injectors and Suction control
Fuel injection timing control
valve
● Fuel temperature sensor
EDU, Fuel injectors and Suction control
● Engine coolant temperature sensor Fuel cut control
valve
● Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
Glow control system Glow relay & glow indictor lamp
● Camshaft position sensor
On board diagnostic system Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
● Vehicle speed sensor
EGR volume control EGR volume control valve
● Ignition switch
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay
● Stop Lamp switch
● Air conditioner switch
● Park/neutral position switch Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
● Battery voltage
● Power steering oil pressure switch
Fuel Injection Control System EBS00DBB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Three types of fuel injection control are provided to accommodate engine operating conditions; normal control, idle
control and start control. The ECM determines the appropriate fuel injection control. Under each control, the amount of
fuel injected is adjusted to improve engine performance.
Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and Electronic Drive Unit (EDU). EDU controls fuel injectors according to
the input signals to adjust the amount of fuel injected to the preset value.
START CONTROL
Input/Output Signal Chart
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed
Fuel injection EDU
Camshaft position sensor Piston position
control (start Fuel injectors Suction
Ignition switch Start signal control) control valve
Common rail fuel pressure sensor Common rail fuel pressure
When the ECM receives a start signal from the ignition switch, the ECM
adapts the fuel injection system for the start control. The amount of fuel
injected at engine starting is a preset program value in the ECM. The
program is determined by the engine speed, engine coolant temperature
and common rail fuel pressure.
For better startability under cool engine conditions, the lower the coolant
temperature becomes, the greater the amount of fuel injected. The ECM
ends the start control when the engine speed reaches the specific value, and
shifts the control to the normal or idle control.
SEF648S
EC-398
[YD]
IDLE CONTROL
Input/Output Signal Chart A

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature EC
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position C
Fuel injection EDU
Accelerator pedal released position switch Accelerator pedal released position control (Idle Fuel injectors Suction
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed control) control valve
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner signal D
Common rail fuel pressure sensor Common rail fuel pressure
E
When the ECM determines that the engine speed is at idle, the fuel injection system is adapted for the idle
control. The ECM regulates the amount of fuel injected corresponding to changes in load applied to the engine to keep
engine speed constant. The ECM also provides the system with a fast idle control in response to the
engine coolant temperature signal. F
NORMAL CONTROL
G
Fuel injection EDU
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator position control (Nor- Fuel injectors Suction H
Common rail fuel pressure sensor Common rail fuel pressure mal control) control valve
The amount of fuel injected under normal driving conditions is deter- I

mined according to sensor signals. The crankshaft position sensor
(TDC) detects engine speed, the accelerator pedal position sensor detects
accelerator pedal position and common rail fuel pressure
sensor detects common rail fuel pressure. These sensors send sig- J
nals to the ECM.
The fuel injection data, predetermined by correlation between vari-
ous engine speeds, accelerator pedal positions and common rail fuel K
pressure are stored in the ECM memory, forming a map. The ECM
determines the optimal amount of fuel to be injected using the sen-
sor signals in comparison with the map.
L
MAXIMUM AMOUNT CONTROL
SEF649S M
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Fuel injection EDU
control (Maxi- Fuel Injectors Suction
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed mum amount control valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator position control)
The maximum injection amount is controlled to an optimum by the engine speed, intake air amount, engine coolant
temperature, and accelerator opening in accordance with the driving conditions.
This prevents the oversupply of the injection amount caused by decreased air density at a high altitude or during a
system failure.
EC-399
[YD]
DECELERATION CONTROL
Accelerator pedal released position switch Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection EDU
control (Decel- Fuel injectors Suction
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed eration control) control valve
The ECM sends a fuel cut signal to the fuel injector and suction control valve during deceleration for better fuel
efficiency. The ECM determines the time of deceleration according to signals from the accelerator pedal released
position switch and crankshaft position sensor (TDC).
Fuel Injection Timing Control System EBS00DBC
DESCRIPTION
The target fuel injection timing in accordance with the engine speed and the fuel injection amount are recorded as a map in
the ECM beforehand. The ECM determines the optimum injection timing using sensor signals accordance with the map.
Air Conditioning Cut Control EBS00DBD
INPUT / OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal opening angle
Air conditioner Air conditioner relay
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
cut control
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves acceleration when the air conditioner is used.
When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed, the air conditioner is turned off for a few seconds.
When engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the air conditioner is turned off. This continues until the
engine coolant temperature returns to normal.
Fuel Cut Control (At No Load & High Engine Speed) EBS00DBE

EDU
Accelerator pedal released position switch Accelerator position Fuel cut control Fuel injectors Suction
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed control valve
If the engine speed is above 2,800 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 2,800 rpm) fuel will
be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. Fuel cut will operate
until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under EC-394, "Fuel Injection Control Sys-
tem" .
EC-400
[YD]
Crankcase Ventilation System EBS00DBF
DESCRIPTION A
In this system, blow-by gas is sucked into the air duct after oil separation by oil separator in the rocker cover.
EC
INSPECTION H
Ventilation Hose
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose I
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
PBIB0590E
SEC692
M
EC-401
[YD]
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
Fuel Filter EBS00DBG
DESCRIPTION
A water draining cock is on the lower side and a priming pump for bleeding air is on the upper side.
AIR BLEEDING
Pump the priming pump to bleed air.
● When air is bled completely, the pumping of the priming pump
suddenly becomes heavy. Stop the operation at that time.
● If it is difficult to bleed air by the pumping of the priming pump (the
pumping of the priming pump does not become heavy), disconnect
the fuel supply hose between the fuel filter and the fuel gallery. Then,
perform the operation described above, and make sure that fuel comes
out. (Use a pan, etc. so as not to spill fuel. Do not let fuel get on
engine and other parts.) After that, connect the hose, then bleed air
again.
● Start engine and let it idle for at least one minute after performing air
bleeding.
WATER DRAINING
If the MIL flashes during the engine operation, drain the water as follows. SEF375Y
1. Remove the fuel filter, filter bracket, protector assembly from the dash panel as follows.
a. Remove the air cleaner case (upper), air duct assembly, and vacuum hose for brake booster (between the vacuum
pump and vacuum pipe).
CAUTION:
After the duct is removed, cover the opening with gum tape, etc. to prevent foreign object from
getting into the engine during the operation.
b. Remove the mounting nuts on the dash panel, then remove the fuel filter, filter bracket, and protector assembly
from the dash panel.
● It is not necessary to disconnect the fuel hose.
2. Using a tool such as a pliers, loosen the water draining cock at the
bottom of the fuel filter.
Loosening drain cock four to five turns causes water to
start draining.
Do not remove drain cock by loosening it excessively.
If water does not drain properly, move the priming pump up and
down.
CAUTION:
● When the water is drained, the fuel is also drained. Use a
pan, etc. to avoid fuel adherence to the rubber parts
such as the engine mount insulator.
● Do not over-tighten the water draining cock. This will
damage the cock thread, resulting in water or fuel leak.
3. Bleed air of the fuel filter. Refer to EC-398 .
SMA825B
4. Start the engine, then check that the MIL goes off.
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning EBS00DBH
DESCRIPTION
“Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning” is an operating to learn the fully released position of the accelerator pedal
by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed when accelerator work unit or
ECM is replaced.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
EC-402
[YD]
2. Select “OFF ACCEL PO SIG” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II A
3. Make sure that accelerator pedal is released.
EC
D
4. Touch “CLEAR” and wait a few seconds.
PBIB0411E
E
5. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. H
PBIB0412E
K
Fuel Pressure Relief Valve EBS00DBI
DESCRIPTION
L
When the fuel pressure in common rail increases to excessively high, fuel pressure relief valve opens to carry
PBIB0413E
excess fuel to the return hose.
FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CHECK M

WARNING:
Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
2. Remove fuel hose from fuel pressure relief valve.
3. Attach a blind cap or plug to removed hose.
EC-403 PBIB0467E
[YD]
5. Select “PRES REGULATOR” in “ACTIVE TEST MODE” with
CONSULT-II.
6. Start engine and keep engine speed 2,000 rpm.
7. Raise fuel pressure to 135 MPa with touching “UP” or “Qu” on the
CONSULT-II screen.
8. Confirm that the fuel does not come out from the fuel pressure relief
valve.
WARNING:
If the fuel comes out, stop the engine immediately.
9. If NG, replace common rail.
PBIB0587E
EC-404
[YD]
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
A
DTC and MIL Detection Logic EBS00DBJ
When a malfunction is detected, the malfunction (DTC) is stored in the ECM memory.
The MIL will light up each time the ECM detects malfunction. For diagnostic items causing the MIL to light up, refer to EC
EC-388, "INDEX FOR DTC" .
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) EBS00DBK
HOW TO READ DTC C

The DTC can be read by CONSULT-II only.
With CONSULT-II
D
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Example: P0115, P0335, P1233, etc. These
DTCs are prescribed by ISO15031-6.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
E
HOW TO ERASE DTC
How to Erase DTC ( With CONSULT-II)
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least F
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. G
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF- DIAG
RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) EBS00DBL
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed
PBIB0476E
on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) in BL section.
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DAIG RESULTS” mode
with CONSULT-II.
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and
registration of all NATS ignition key IDs must be carried
out with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
EC-405
[YD]
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedure of NATS
initialization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, NATS.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) EBS00DBM
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to DI-38, "WARNING LAMPS" or
see EC-562 .
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
If MIL illuminates or blinks irregularly after starting engine,
water may have accumulated in fuel filter. drain water from fuel
filter. Refer to EC-398 .
On Board Diagnostic System Function
The on board diagnostic system has the following two functions.
SAT652J
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit. (See EC-
562, "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR" .)
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When ECM detects a mal-
WARNING function, the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a mal-
function has been detected.
Diagnostic Test Mode I - Bulb Check

In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to DI- 38,
"WARNING LAMPS" or see EC-562 .
Diagnostic Test Mode I - Malfunction Warning
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected or the ECM's CPU is malfunctioning.
OFF No malfunction.
EC-406
[YD]
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, CONSULT-II and Driving Patterns
A
EC
PBIB0902E
*1: When a malfunction is detected, MIL *2: MILMIL will not light up after ignition *3: When a malfunction is detected for the
will light up. switch is turned OFF. first time, the DTC will be stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC will not be displayed any *5: Other screens except SELF-DIAG-
longer after vehicle is driven 40 times NOSTIC RESULTS & DATA MONI-
without the same malfunction. (The TOR (AUTO TRIG) cannot display the
DTC still remain in ECM.) malfunction. DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG) can display the malfunction at
the moment it is detected.
EC-407
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction EBS00DBN
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel injection
control, fuel injection timing control, glow control system, etc. The ECM
accepts input signals from sensors and instantly actuators. It is essential
that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the same time,
it is important that there are no problems such as vacuum leaks, or other
problems with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit- tently

rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor
MEF036D
electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of
suspected circuits may help prevent the replace- ment of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road test
with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be performed.
Follow the EC-405, "WORK FLOW" .
SEF233G
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer
can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent
ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they
occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the example on next page should
be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first. This
will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically con-
trolled engine vehicle.
SEF234G
EC-408
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
WORK FLOW
A
EC
PBIB0903E
*1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” *2 If the incident cannot be verified, per- *3 If the on board diagnostic system cannot be
is other than “0”, perform EC-435, form EC-435, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- performed, check main power supply and
"TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SIS FOR INTERMITTENT ground circuit. Refer to EC-436,
INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . INCIDENT" . "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
ECM" .
*4 If malfunctioning part cannot be
detected, perform EC-435, "TROU-
BLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMIT-
TENT INCIDENT" .
EC-409
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
Description for Work Flow
STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the EC-406,
STEP I
"DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET" .
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II) the DTC, then erase the DTC. Refer
to EC-401 .
STEP II If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-435, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The “Symptom
Matrix Chart” will be useful. Refer to EC-411 .) Also check related service bulletins for information.
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The “DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET” is useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA
STEP III MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-435, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" . If
the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the DTC by driving in (or performing) the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”. Check and read the DTC by using
CONSULT-II.
During the DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and
check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-435, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT" .
In case the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” is not available, perform the “Overall Function Check” instead. The DTC cannot be
displayed by this check, however, this simplified “check” is an effective alternative.
The “NG” result of the “Overall Function Check” is the same as the DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to Trouble Diagnosis for DTC PXXXX.
STEP V If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the Basic Inspection, EC-407 . Then perform inspections according to the Symptom
Matrix Chart. Refer to EC-411 .
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the system for
mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) “Harness Layouts”.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”
mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II. Refer to
EC-420 or EC-431 .
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is
STEP VI also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to GI-24, "How to Per- form Efficient Diagnosis
for an Electrical Incident" , “Circuit Inspection”.
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If the malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-435, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
DENT" .
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint.
Perform the “DTC Confirmation Procedure” and confirm the normal code (DTC P0000) is detected. If the incident is still
STEP VII detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) DTC in ECM. (Refer to EC-401
.)
DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET

There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of engine
components. A good grasp of such conditions can make troubleshooting
faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important
to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one shown below in order to
organize all the information for troubleshooting.
SEF907L
EC-410
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
Worksheet Sample
A
EC
MTBL0533
Basic Inspection EBS00DBO
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical loads applied;
● Headlamp switch is OFF.
● On vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, set lighting switch to the 1st position to light
only small lamps.
● Air conditioner switch is OFF.
● Rear defogger switch is OFF.
● Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
EC-411
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related problem.
2. Check the current need for scheduled maintenance, especially for fuel filter and air cleaner filter. Refer to MA-7,
"PERIODIC MAINTENANCE (EXCEPT FOR EUROPE)" .
3. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks, or improper connections
– Wiring for improper connections, pinches, or cuts
4. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
>> GO TO 2.
2. PREPARATION FOR CHECKING IDLE
SPEED With CONSULT-II

SEF142I
Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector.
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “CKPS·RPM (TDC)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Read idle speed.
72525 rpm
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor. OK SEF817Y
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-412
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
5. BLEED AIR FROM FUEL SYSTEM
A
1. Stop engine.
2. Use priming pump to bleed air from fuel system. Refer to EC-398, "AIR BLEEDING" .
EC
>> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN C
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and let it idle. D
3. Read idle speed.
E
72525 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END F
NG >> GO TO 7.
H
7. DRAIN WATER FROM FUEL FILTER
Drain water from fuel filter. Refer to EC-398, "WATER DRAINING" . SEF817Y I
>> GO TO 8.
J
8. CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
K
3. Read idle speed. L
72525 rpm
OK or NG M
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK AIR CLEANER FILTER
Check air cleaner filter for clogging or breaks. SEF817Y
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace air cleaner filter.
EC-413
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
10. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE
Check battery voltage.

Voltage: More than 12.13V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11. 11.
CHECK BATTERY Refer to
SC-3, "BATTERY" .
OK or NG
OK >> Check charging system. Refer to SC-12 . NG
12. CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-176, "CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE" . OK or

NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Follow the instruction of “CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE”.
13. CHECK IDLE SPEED
AGAIN With CONSULT-II

3. Read idle speed.
72525 rpm
OK or NG
NG >> 1. Replace fuel injector.
2. GO TO 3.
SEF817Y
EC-414
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
Symptom Matrix Chart EBS00DBP
A
SYMPTOM
Reference page
ENGINE STALL
KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER
POOR ACCELERATION
HI IDLE
LOW IDLE
EC
E
NO START (with first firing)
NO START (without first firing)
HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS COLD
HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS HOT
AT IDLE
DURING DRIVING
WHEN DECELERATING
F
SYSTEM — Basic engine control system
J
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF
Fuel supply pump 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 —
Fuel injector 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 3 EC-463 K
EDU (Electronic drive unit) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 4 4 EC-490
Glow control system 1 1 1 1 1 EC-532
L
Engine body 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 EM-105
EGR system 3 3 EC-539
Air cleaner and duct 3 3 MA-26 M
Fuel pressure relief valve EC-399
Suction control valve circuit 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-508
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-463
EDU circuit 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-490
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 1 EC-442
ENGINE CONTROL
Engine coolant temperature circuit 1 1 1 1 EC-447

Vehicle speed sensor circuit 1 EC-480
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 1 1 1 EC-451
Accelerator pedal released position
1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-519
switch circuit
Common rail fuel pressure sensor
EC-459
circuit
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-470
circuit
EC-415
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
SYMPTOM
Reference page
ENGINE STALL
KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER
POOR ACCELERATION
HI IDLE
LOW IDLE
NO START (with first firing)
NO START (without first firing)
HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS COLD
HARD TO START WHEN ENGINE IS HOT
AT IDLE
DURING DRIVING
WHEN DECELERATING
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF

Camshaft position sensor circuit 3 3 EC-475
Start signal circuit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-555
Ignition switch circuit 1 1 1 1 EC-436
Power supply for ECM circuit 1 1 1 1 EC-436
ENGINE CONTROL
Cooling fan relay circuit EC-497

EGR volume control valve circuit 1 1 1 EC-539
Glow relay circuit 1 1 1 1 EC-532
ECM relay (Self-shutoff) circuit 1 1 1 1 EC-526
EC-485,
ECM, connector circuit 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-524
Air conditioner relay circuit 1 1 EC-561
Air conditioner switch circuit EC-561
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) 1 EC-401
1 - 5: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued
on next page)
EC-416
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
SYMPTOM A
Reference page
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
OVERHEAT/HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
ABNORMAL SMOKE COLOR
DEAD BATTERY (UNDER CHARGE)
Malfunction indicator lamp illuminates.
Can be detected by CONSULT-II?

EC
D
BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
E
Warranty symptom code AG AH AJ AK AL AM AP HA

G
Fuel supply pump 5 5 5 5 1 1 —
Fuel injector 3 3 3 4 4 4 1 1 EC-463
EDU (Electronic drive unit) 4 4 4 5 5 5 1 1 EC-490 H
Glow system 1 EC-532
Engine body 3 3 3 3 1 3 EM-105
EGR system 3 EC-539 I
Air cleaner and duct 3 MA-26

Fuel pressure relief valve EC-399
J
Suction control valve circuit 4 4 4 4 1 1 EC-508
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-463
EDU circuit 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 EC-490 K
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 1 EC-442
ENGINE CONTROL
Engine coolant temperature circuit 1 1 1 1 1 EC-447

Vehicle speed sensor circuit 1 1 EC-480 L
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 1 1 1 EC-451
Accelerator pedal released position switch
1 1 EC-519 M
circuit
Common rail fuel pressure sensor
1 1 EC-459
circuit
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
1 1 1 1 EC-470
circuit
EC-417
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
SYMPTOM
Reference page
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
OVERHEAT/HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
ABNORMAL SMOKE COLOR
DEAD BATTERY (UNDER CHARGE)
Malfunction indicator lamp illuminates.
Can be detected by CONSULT-II?

BLACK SMOKE
WHITE SMOKE
Warranty symptom code AG AH AJ AK AL AM AP HA
Camshaft position sensor circuit EC-475
Start signal circuit EC-555
Ignition switch circuit EC-436
Power supply for ECM circuit 1 1 EC-436
ENGINE CONTROL
Cooling fan relay circuit 2 EC-497

EGR volume control valve circuit 1 EC-539
Glow relay circuit 1 EC-532
ECM relay (Self-shutoff) circuit 1 EC-526
EC-
ECM, connector circuit 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 485,EC-
524
Air conditioner relay circuit EC-561
Air conditioner switch circuit EC-561
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) 1 EC-401
1 - 5: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. (continued
on next page)
EC-418
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
Engine Control Component Parts Location EBS00DBQ
EC
PBIB0952E
EC-419
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
PBIB0474E
EC-420
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
EC
PBIB0475E
EC-421
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
Circuit Diagram EBS00DBR
TBWA0099E
EC-422
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
EC
TBWA0170E
EC-423
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout EBS00DBS
ECM Terminals And Reference Value EBS00DBT
PREPARATION
PBIB0473E
1. ECM is located behind the glove box. For this inspection, remove
glove box.
PBIB0377E
2. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector connected.

Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
● Open harness securing clip to make testing easier.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Remarks: Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION: MEC486B
EC-424
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI- A
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR (DC Voltage and Pulse Signal)
NO.
0 - 4V
EC
[Engine is running]
C
● Idle speed
A L/W EDU drive No. 2 D

1 Y/PU EDU drive No. 4
PBIB0387E
A PU EDU drive No. 3
2 Y EDU drive No. 1 0 - 4V
A E
3
[Engine is running]
A
4 ● Warm-up condition
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm F
PBIB0388E
A B G
[Engine is running]
5 B ECM ground Approximately 0V
A B ● Idle speed
6
H
A
7
A8 R BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
A9 R (11 - 14V) I
0.5 - 2.5V
J
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed K
L
A10 R Mass air flow sensor PBIB0389E
1.5 - 3.5V
M
[Engine is running]
PBIB0390E
[Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V

Engine coolant tempera-
A11 L/OR Output voltage varies with engine
ture sensor ● Warm-up condition coolant temperature
[Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V

A12 PU Fuel temperature sensor Output voltage varies with fuel
● Warm-up condition temperature
Accelerator pedal released
EC-425
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
[Engine is running]
A24 B Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
A25 G/W Injector's ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
A26 LG/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
sensor 2 ground
A27 W Sensor's power supply [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
A28 PU/R [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
1 - 5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
A29 W/PU EDU injector check signal PBIB0391E

1 - 5V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0392E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
A31 W/L Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
0.1 - 14V
B3 W
[Engine is running] (Voltage signals of each ECM ter-
B4 OR/B
EGR volume control valve Warm-up condition minals differ according to the con-
B5 W/L ●
trol position of EGR volume control
B6 GY ● Idle speed valve.)
Fuel injector adjustment
B9 G/B
resistor No.2
Fuel injector adjustment 0.2 - 4.8V
B10 Y/B
resistor No.4 (There are individual differences
Fuel injector adjustment [Ignition switch “ON”] between fuel injector adjustment
B11 R/B resistor No.3 resistors.)

B12 W/B
resistor No.1
[Engine is running]
B13 Y/R Common rail fuel pressure ● Idle speed
B14 Y/R sensor [Engine is running]
EC-426
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
EC-427
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA A
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
0.8 - 1.3V
● Accelerator pedal fully released EC
B15 W
C
B16 G
sensor 2 [Ignition switch “ON”] D
[Engine is running]
B18 R/G Camshaft position sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V E
ground
● Idle speed
0 - 3V
F
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition G
● Idle speed
B19 R/Y Camshaft position sensor PBIB0393E

0 - 8V
I
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition J
PBIB0394E
[Engine is running]
L
B20 L/R Crankshaft position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor (TDC) ground
● Idle speed
0 - 12.5V M
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Crankshaft position sen-

B21 L/G sor (TDC) PBIB0395E
0 - 30V
[Engine is running]
EC-428
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
PBIB0397E
0 - 12.5V
D1 L/OR Tachometer
[Engine is running]
PBIB0398E

● Glow lamp is “ON” Approximately 1.0V
D2 OR Glow lamp
● Glow lamp is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 1.0V
D9 OR/L Malfunction indicator lamp [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE

● Air conditioner switch is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
D11 L Air conditioner relay [Engine is running]

● Both air conditioner switch and blower fan Approximately 0.1V
switch are “ON” (Compressor is operating)
● Accelerator pedal slightly depressed (11 - 14V)
D14 G/Y
position switch [Ignition switch “ON”]
● Accelerator pedal fully released Approximately 0V
D18 W/R BATTERY VOLTAGE

Ignition switch [Ignition switch “ON”]
D19 W/R (11 - 14V)
● Air conditioner switch is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
D23 PU/W Air conditioner switch [Engine is running]

● Both air conditioner switch and blower fan Approximately 0.1V
switch are “ON” (compressor is operating)
● For a few seconds after turning ignition Approximately 0V
D24 G switch “OFF”
D26 G ECM relay (self-shutoff) [Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch “OFF”
EC-429
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA A
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released EC
D25 R/G Stop lamp switch
● Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V)
C
D27 B/Y Start signal BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Ignition switch “START”]
(11 - 14V)
D
0 - 12.5V
E
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
F
Suction control valve

E1 L power supply PBIB0399E G
0 - 12.5V
H
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm I
J
PBIB0400E
E2 LG Cooling fan relay (Low) K
[Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is operating Approximately 0.1V
[Engine is running]
L
● Cooling fan is not operating BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Cooling fan is operating at low speed
E7 LG/B Cooling fan relay (High)
[Engine is running] M
● Cooling fan is operating at high speed Approximately 0.1V
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
E8 Y/G Suction control valve 1 PBIB0401E
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
EC-430
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Steering wheel is being turned
Power steering oil pres-
E12 P/B
sure switch [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Steering wheel is not being turned (11 - 14V)
● Gear position is “Neutral” Approximately 0V
Park/Neutral position
E13 G/OR
switch [Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
E16 G/W Suction control valve 2 PBIB0401E

0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0402E
0 - 5V
[Engine is running]
● Lift up the vehicle
E21 L/B Vehicle speed sensor ● In 2nd gear position
● Vehicle speed is 30 km/h (19 MPH)
PBIB0386E
CONSULT-II Function EBS00DBU
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE

2. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector, which is located
under the driver side dash panel.
EC-431
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
4. Touch “START”. A
EC
D
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual. SEF995X
E
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

H
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
PBIB0410E
Item SELF-DIAG DATA MONI- ACTIVE
RESULTS TOR TEST
I
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)  
Camshaft position sensor 
Engine coolant temperature sensor   J
Vehicle speed sensor  
Fuel temperature sensor  
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1   K
Accelerator pedal position sensor 2  

Accelerator pedal released position switch  
L
Common rail fuel pressure sensor  
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch 
INPUT
Mass air flow sensor  
M
Battery voltage  
Power steering oil pressure switch 
Stop lamp switch 
Absolute pressure sensor  
Fuel injector adjustment resistor 
Suction control valve   
Fuel injector   
Glow relay  
OUTPUT
Cooling fan relay   
EGR volume control valve  
X: Applicable
EC-432
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Regarding items detected in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode, refer to — EC-388, "INDEX FOR DTC" .
DATA MONITOR MODE
ECM
Main
MONITOR ITEM input CONDITION SPECIFICATION
signals
signal
● The engine speed computed from the
CKPS·RPM (TDC) [rpm]   crankshaft position sensor (TDC) signal
is displayed.
When the engine coolant temperature
● The engine coolant temperature
circuit is open or short, ECM enters fail-
COOLAN TEMP/S (determined by the signal voltage of the
safe mode. The engine coolant temper-
[C] or [F]   engine coolant temperature sensor) is
ature determined by the ECM is dis-
displayed.
played.
● The vehicle speed computed form
VHCL SPEED SE
  the vehicle speed sensor signal is
[km/h] or [mph]
displayed.
● The fuel temperature (determined by
FUEL TEMP SEN [C] or [F]   the signal voltage of the fuel temper-
ature sensor) is displayed.
● The accelerator pedal position sensor
ACCEL POS SEN [V]  
1 signal voltage is displayed.
● The accelerator pedal position sensor
ACCEL SEN 2 [V]  
2 signal voltage is displayed.
● indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
OFF ACCEL SW [ON/OFF]   accelerator pedal released position
switch signal.
● The common rail fuel pressure
(determined by the signal voltage of
ACT CR PRESS [MPa]  
the common rail fuel pressure sensor)
is displayed.
● The power supply voltage of ECM is
BATTERY VOLT [V]  
displayed.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
P/N POSI SW [ON/OFF]   the park/neutral position switch sig-
nal.
● indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
START SIGNAL [ON/OFF]  
the starter signal.
PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/OFF]  the power steering oil pressure
switch signal.
BRAKE SW [ON/OFF]  
the stop lamp switch signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
IGN SW [ON/OFF]  
ignition switch signal.
● The signal voltage of the mass air
MAS AIR/FL SE [V]  
flow sensor is displayed.
● Indicates [CA] of suction control
SUCTION CV [CA] 
valve operating angle.
● Indicates the actual fuel injection
MAIN INJ WID [msec]  pulse width compensated by ECM
● The glow relay control condition
GLOW RLY [ON/OFF]  (determined by ECM according to
the input signal) is displayed.
EC-433
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
ECM
Main A
MONITOR ITEM input CONDITION SPECIFICATION
signals
signal
● Indicates the control condition of the
cooling fans (determined by ECM EC
COOLING FAN  according to the input signal).
[LOW/HI/OFF] LOW ... Operates at low speed. HI
... Operates at high speed. OFF ...
Stopped
C
● Indicates the EGR volume control value

computed by the ECM according to
EGR VOL CON/V [step] the input signals. D

● The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
● The intake air volume computed from the E
INT/A VOLUME [mg/] mass air flow sensor signal is dis-
played.
● The barometric pressure (determined F
by the signal voltage from the absolute
BARO SEN [kPa]   pressure sensor built into the ECM) is
displayed.
G
● The cylinder being injected is dis-
played.
0 ... Cylinder No.1 is injected. 1
... Cylinder No.3 is injected. 2 H
CYL COUNT [0/1/2/3]
... Cylinder No.4 is injected. 3
... Cylinder No.2 is injected.
Voltage [V] I
Frequency [msec], [Hz] or
[%] Only “#” is displayed if item is unable to
be measured.
DUTY-HI J
Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse
DUTY-LOW They are the same figures as an actual
width measured by the probe.
PLS WIDTH-HI piece of data which was just previously
measured. [Hz] or [%] K
PLS WIDTH-LOW
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
L
ACTIVE TEST MODE
M
● Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine.
● A/C switch “OFF” ● Harness and connectors
POWER BAL-
● Shift lever “N” Engine runs rough or dies. ● Compression
ANCE
● Cut off each injector signal one at a ● Fuel injectors
time using CONSULT-II
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connector
● Operate the cooling fan at “LOW”, Cooling fan moves at “LOW”, “HI”
speed and stops. ● Cooling fan motor
COOLING FAN “HI” speed and turn “OFF” using
CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan relay
OFF ACCEL PO
● This mode is used for ECM to learn accelerator pedal released positions.
SIG
EC-434
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
● Harness and connector
GLOW RELAY ● Turn the glow relay “ON” and Glow relay makes the operating
“OFF” using CONSULT-II and lis- sound. ● Glow relay
ten to operating sound.
EGR VOL CONT/ ● Change EGR volume control EGR volume control valve makes an ● Harness and connector
V valve opening step using CON- operating sound. ● EGR volume control valve
SULT-II.
● Fuel line
PRES REGULA- ● Change fuel pressure in common Fuel leaks.
TOR ● Fuel pressure relief valve
rail using CONSULT-II
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE

CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
– The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen in real
time.
In other words, DTC will be displayed if the malfunction is detected
by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONITOR” in
“DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording Data ... xx%”
as shown in the figure, and the data after the malfunction detection is
recorded. Then when the percentage reached 100%, “REAL-TIME
DIAG” screen is displayed. If “STOP” is touched on the screen during
“ Recording Data ... xx%”, “REAL- TIME DIAG” screen is also
displayed.
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the recording speed can be changed by “TRIG- GER
POINT” and “Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MANUAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger): PBIB0480E
– DTC will not be displayed automatically on CONSULT-II screen

even though a malfunction is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though a
malfunction is detected.
Use these triggers as follows:
1. “AUTO TRIG”
– While trying to detect the DTC by performing the “DTC Confir-
mation Procedure”, be sure to select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
– While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)”
mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, components and
SEF707X
harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC will be displayed.
Refer to GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMU- LATION
TESTS”.
2. “MANU TRIG”
EC-435
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
– If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU TRIG”.
By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for further
A diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
EC
FUNCTION TEST J
This mode is used to inform customers of their vehicle condition of periodic maintenance.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DBV

K
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations. L
MONITOR ITEM
SEF720X
CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CKPS-RPM (TDC) ● Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT- II Almost the same speed as the M
value CONSULT-II value
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70C (158F)

● Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the Almost the same speed as the
VHCL SPEED SE
CONSULT-II value CONSUT-II value
FUEL TEMP SEN ● Engine: After warming up More than 40C (104F)
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully released 0.8 - 1.3V

ACCEL POS SEN (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: fully depressed More than 3.5V
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully released 0.3 - 1.8V

ACCEL SEN 2 (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: fully depressed More than 3.0V
Accelerator pedal: fully released ON
OFF ACCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: slightly
(Engine stopped) OFF
depressed
EC-436
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
● Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 2.5V
MAS AIR/FL SE ● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm 2.1 - 2.7V
● No-load
Shift lever: Neutral position ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON Except above OFF
Steering wheel is in neutral posi-
OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL ● Engine: After warming up, idle tion. (Forward direction)
IGN SW ● Ignition switch: ON  OFF ON  OFF
● Engine: After warming up Idle 30 - 40 MPa
ACT CR PRESS ● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm 40 - 50 MPa
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 70.0 - 71.5CA
SUCTION CV ● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm 73.5 - 75.0CA
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up No-load 0.68 - 0.78 msec
MAIN INJ WID ● Shift lever: Neutral position Air conditioner switch: ON
0.78 - 0.88 msec
● Idle speed Rear window defogger switch: ON
GLOW RLY Refer to EC-532, "GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM" .
● When cooling fan is stopped. OFF
COOLING FAN ● When cooling fans operate at low speed. LOW

● When cooling fans operate at high speed. HIGH
● Engine: After warming up After one minute at idle More than 10 steps
EGR VOL CON/V ● Shift lever: Neutral position Revving engine from idle to 3,600 0 step
rpm
● No-load
INT/A VOLUME ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 150 - 450 mg/st
Altitude
Approx. 0m: Approx. 100.62 kPa
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2 , 14.59
psi)
Approx. 1,000 m: Approx. 88.95
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2 ,
12.90 psi)
BARO SEN ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1,500 m: Approx. 83.16
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2 ,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2 ,
11.36 psi)
CYL COUNT ● Engine is running 0123
EC-437
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]

A
EC
● No-load
Shift lever: Neutral position ON C
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON Except above OFF
D
Steering wheel is in neutral posi-
OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL ● Engine: After warming up, idle tion. (Forward direction)
E
IGN SW ● Ignition switch: ON  OFF ON  OFF F
ACT CR PRESS ● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm 40 - 50 MPa G
● No-load
H
● No-load
I
MAIN INJ WID ● Shift lever: Neutral position Air conditioner switch: ON
0.78 - 0.88 msec
● Idle speed Rear window defogger switch: ON J
GLOW RLY Refer to EC-532, "GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM" .
● When cooling fan is stopped. OFF
● When cooling fans operate at low speed. LOW K
COOLING FAN
● When cooling fans operate at high speed. HIGH
L
rpm
● No-load M
INT/A VOLUME ● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine 150 - 450 mg/st
Altitude
Approx. 0m: Approx. 100.62 kPa
(1.0062 bar, 1.026 kg/cm2 , 14.59
psi)
kPa (0.8895 bar, 0.907 kg/cm2 ,
12.90 psi)
BARO SEN ● Ignition switch: ON Approx. 1,500 m: Approx. 83.16
kPa (0.8316 bar, 0.848 kg/cm2 ,
12.06 psi)
kPa (0.7836 bar, 0.799 kg/cm2 ,
11.36 psi)
CYL COUNT ● Engine is running 0123
EC-438
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[YD]
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DBW
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
ACCEL POS SEN, “CKPS·RPM (TDC)”, “MAS AIR/FL SE”
Below is the data for “ACCEL POS SEN”, “CKPS·RPM (TDC)” and “MAS AIR/FL SE” when revving engine
quickly up to 3,000 rpm under no load after warming up engine to the normal operating temperature.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
EC-439
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
[YD]
TROUBLE
SEF321Y
DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
A
Description EBS00DBX
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the problem resolves itself (the part or circuit function returns to
normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's complaint often do EC
not recur on DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occurrences is poor electrical connections.
Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as
part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific
problem area. C
COMMON I/I REPORT SITUATIONS

STEP in Work Flow Situation D
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
E
IV DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for XXXX does not indicate the problem area.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DBY F
1. INSPECTION START G
Erase DTCs. Refer to EC-401, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .
H
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

I
Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “CIRCUIT INSPECTION”, “Ground
Inspection”. J
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace. K
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Perform GI-24, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" , “INCIDENT SIMULATION L
TESTS”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END M
EC-440
[YD]
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM PFP:24110
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DBZ
Remarks: Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
A5 B [Engine is running]
A6 B ECM ground Approximately 0V
A7 B ● Idle speed
A9 R (11 - 14V)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
A31 W/L Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch “ON”]
(11 - 14V)
D19 W/R (11 - 14V)
ECM relay (self-shutoff)
D26 G
● A few seconds passed after turning ignition BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch “OFF” (11 - 14V)
EC-441
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DC0
EC
TBWA0101E
EC-442
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DC1
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 6.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Check voltage between ECM terminals D18, D19 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

● 10A fuse
4. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals A5, A6, A7 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-443
[YD]
5. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
A
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON” and then “OFF”.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals A8, A9 and ground with EC
Voltage:
C
After turning ignition switch “OFF”,
battery voltage will exist for a few
seconds, then
drop to approximately 0V. D
OK or NG
OK >> Check EDU power supply circuit. Refer to EC-494,
"Diagnostic Procedure" . E
NG >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III PBIB0357E F
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 6 and ground J

PBIB0377E
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
L

● 20A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery
EC-444
[YD]
8. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals D24, D26 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals A8, A9 and ECM relay terminal 7. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK ECM RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

2. Check voltage between ECM terminal A31 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.

● 20A fuse
EC-445
[YD]
13. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals A5, A6, A7 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
EC
OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D

E
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection EBS00DC2
F
ECM RELAY
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. G
12V direct current supply between ter- H
Yes
minals 1 and 2
OFF No
3. If NG, replace ECM relay. I
PBIB0077E
K
EC-446
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS)
[YD]
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR (MAFS) PFP:22680
Component Description EBS00DC3
The mass air flow sensor (MAFS) is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake air flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
air flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from
the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a
certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the intake
air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain the
temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air
flow by means of this current change.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DC4

MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SEF987W SPECIFICATION
● Air conditioner switch: “OFF”
● No-load
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DC5
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
A9 R (11 - 14V)
0.5 - 2.5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
PBIB0389E
1.5 - 3.5V
A10 R Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
PBIB0390E
[Engine is running]
A24 B Mass air flow sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
EC-447
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA A
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
[Ignition switch “OFF”] EC
D26 G C
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) D
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DC6
E
DTC Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)
P0100 ● An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
sent to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Mass air flow sensor F
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DC7
WITH CONSULT-II
G
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”, and wait at least 6 seconds.
3. Start engine and wait at least 3 seconds. H
K
SEF817Y
EC-448
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DC8
TBWA0102E
EC-449
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DC9
1. CHECK MAFS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. EC
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
C
4. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminals 2, 4 and F

SEF884Y
Terminal Voltage G
2 Approximately 5V
4 Battery voltage
H
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
I

J
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM relay K
L
3. CHECK MAFS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
M
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 3 and
engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
Check harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM. PBIB0385E
EC-450
[YD]
5. CHECK MAFS INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal A10. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DCA

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal A10 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch “ON” (Engine stopped.) Approx. 1.0
Idle (Engine is warmed up to normal
1.0 - 2.5
operating temperature.)
2,000 rpm (Engine is warmed up to nor-
2.1 - 2.7
mal operating temperature.)
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect MAFS harness
connector and connect it again.
Then repeat above check.
Removal and Installation EBS00DCB
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR PBIB0361E
EC-451
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
[YD]
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT) A
PFP:22630
Description
EBS00DCC
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant EC
temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The
modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant temperature
input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in C
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as
temperature increases.
D
<Reference data>
F
Engine coolant tempera-
Voltage* (V) Resistance (k)
ture C (F)
10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
G
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.3 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 1.0 0.236 - 0.260 H
*:These data are reference values and measured between ECM terminal A11 (Engine
coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
CAUTION: I
SEF012P
J
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DCD

P0115 ● An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors K
DTC Confirmation Procedure L

WITH CONSULT-II EBS00DCE

2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. M
SEF817Y
EC-452
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DCF
TBWA0103E
EC-453
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DCG
1. CHECK ECTS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
C
4. Check voltage between ECTS terminal 1 and ground with CON- F

SULT-II or tester.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2. H

J
Check harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor.
PBIB0080E
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
3. CHECK ECTS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between ECTS terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. M
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
Check harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor.
EC-454
[YD]
5. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DCH

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature C (F) Resistance k PBIB0081E
20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9

50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are measured between ECM terminal A11 (Engine coolant temperature
sensor) and body ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
Removal and Installation EBS00DCI

Refer to EM-176, "CYLINDER HEAD" . SEF012P
EC-455
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR [YD]
DTC P0120 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR PFP:18002
A
Description EBS00DCJ
The accelerator work unit is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The accelerator pedal position
sensor 1, 2 and accelerator pedal released position switch are built into the accelerator work unit. The sensors detect the EC
accelerator pedal position and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM uses the signal to determine the amount of fuel to
be injected.
The accelerator pedal released position switch detects accelerator pedal released position and sends the sig-
nal to the ECM. The ECM will then determine engine idle conditions. The signal is also used for diagnosing the C
accelerator pedal position sensor.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DCK

J

Accelerator pedal: fully released 0.8 - 1.3V K
ACCEL POS SEN
PBIB0953E (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: fully depressed More than 3.5V
Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully released 0.3 - 1.8V

● L
OFF ACCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: slightly M
depressed
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DCL
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
A21 B position switch ground [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V

A22 LG [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
sensor 1 ground
EC-456
SENSOR [YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
sensor 2 ground
B15 W

B16 G

B23 GY/L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
D14 G/Y
Approximately 0V
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DCM

P0120 ● An improper voltage signal from accelerator pedal ● Harness or connectors
position sensor 1 and/or 2 is send to ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1
● Accelerator pedal position sensor 2
● Accelerator pedal released position switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DCN
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Depress and release fully accelerator pedal slowly.
SEF817Y
EC-457
SENSOR [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DCO
EC
TBWA0171E
EC-458
SENSOR [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DCP
1. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “ACCEL POS SEN” and “ACCEL SEN 2” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “ACCEL POS SEN” and “ACCEL SEN 2” signal under the
Conditions ACCEL POS SEN ACCEL SEN 2

Accelerator pedal fully
0.8 - 1.3V 0.3 - 1.8V
released
More than 3.5V More than 3.0V
depressed
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH FUNCTION
1. Select “OFF ACCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

2. Check “OFF ACCEL SW” signal under the following conditions.
Conditions OFF ACCEL SW

Accelerator pedal fully released ON
Accelerator pedal depressed OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB0404E
EC-459
SENSOR [YD]
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
2. Disconnect accelerator work unit harness connector.
E
4. Check voltage between accelerator work unit terminals 7, 1 and
PBIB0379E
Voltage: Approximately 5V F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5. G
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I

● Harness connectors F30, M63

● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator work unit J
>> Repair harness or connectors. K
5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screw.
3. Check harness continuity between accelerator work unit termi-
nals 2, 8 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. M

or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator work unit
EC-460
SENSOR [YD]
7. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal B15 and accelerator work unit terminal 6, ECM terminal B16 and
accelerator work unit terminal 3. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator work unit
9. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15.
10. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4. Check voltage between accelerator work unit terminal 5 and

PBIB0379E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0365E
EC-461
SENSOR [YD]
A
● Harness for open or short between accelerator work unit and ECM EC

C
12. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
D
3. Check harness continuity between accelerator work unit terminal 4 and ECM terminal A21. Refer to Wir- E
ing Diagram.
F
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. G
NG >> GO TO 13.

H
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator work unit I
J
14. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH
Refer to EC-457, "Component Inspection" . K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 15. L
15. REPLEACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator work unit. M

>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DCQ

With CONSULT-II
1. Reconnect all disconnected harness connectors.
EC-462
SENSOR [YD]
4. Check the indication of “ACCEL POS SEN” and “ACCEL SEN 2”
Conditions ACCEL POS SEN ACCEL SEN 2

0.8 - 1.3V 0.3 - 1.8V
released
More than 3.5V More than 3.0V
depressed
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH

Check continuity between accelerator position switch terminals 4 and 5
under the following conditions. PBIB0403E
Accelerator pedal fully released Should exist.
Accelerator pedal depressed Should not exist.
Removal and Installation EBS00DCR
ACCELERATOR WORK UNIT

Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . PBIB0366E
EC-463
DTC P0190 COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE
SENSOR [YD]
DTC P0190 COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:16638
A
Description EBS00DCS
The common rail fuel pressure sensor is placed to the common rail. It measures the fuel pressure in the common rail.
The sensor sends voltage signal to the ECM. As the pressure increases, the voltage rises. EC
The ECM controls the fuel pressure in the common rail by the suction control valve. The ECM uses the signal from
common rail fuel pressure sensor as a feedback signal.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DCT C
MONITOR CONDITION SPECIFICATOIN D

ACT CR PRESS ● Shift lever: Neutral position 2,000 rpm 40 - 50 MPa E
● No-load
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DCU
F
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam- G
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION H
NO.
[Engine is running]
A23 B Sensor's ground Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● I
● Idle speed
B13 Y/R Common rail fuel pressure ● Idle speed
B14 Y/R sensor K
[Engine is running]
L
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DCV
DTC Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause) M

P0190 ● An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors (The sensor circuit is open or
entered to ECM. shorted.)
● Common rail fuel pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DCW
WITH CONSULT-II
EC-464
SENSOR [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DCX
TBWA0125E
EC-465
SENSOR [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DCY
1. CHECK COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect common rail fuel pressure sensor harness connector.
C
4. Check voltage between common rail fuel pressure sensor termi- F

nal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power H
in harness or connectors.
2. CHECK COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
J
2. Check harness continuity between common rail fuel pressure sensor terminal 3 and engine ground. Refer
to Wiring Diagram. K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
M
Check harness for open or short between ECM and common rail fuel pressure sensor.
EC-466
SENSOR [YD]
4. CHECK COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals B13, B14 and common rail fuel pressure sensor terminal 2.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
5. CHECK COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace common rail.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DCZ
COMMON RAIL FUEL PRESSURE SENSOR

1. Reconnect harness connector disconnected.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminals B13, B14 (Common rail fuel
pressure sensor signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Condition Voltage V
Idle 1.6 - 1.8
2,000 rpm 1.8 - 2.0
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect common rail fuel
pressure sensor harness connector and connect it again. Then repeat
above check.
5. If NG, replace common rail.
Removal and Installation EBS00DD0
COMMON RAIL
Refer to EM-138, "INJECTION TUBE AND FUEL INJECTOR" . PBIB0588E
EC-467
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR
[YD]
DTC P0201 - P0204 FUEL INJECTOR PFP:16600
A
Description EBS00DD1
EC
E
The ECM sends the fuel injection signal to EDU (Electronic Drive Unit). Then the EDU sends ON signals to fuel
injectors to operate them.
PBIB0482E
The EDU monitors injector ground circuit and sends the feedback signal to the ECM.
F
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When fuel injec- G
tor receives ON signal from EDU, the coil in the fuel injector is ener-
gized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows fuel to
flow through the fuel injector into the cylinder. The amount of fuel
injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is H
the length of time the fuel injector remains open. The ECM controls the
injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
I
J
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DD2
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

PBIB0465E K
Shift lever: Neutral position L
MAIN INJ WID ● Air conditioner switch: ON
0.78 - 0.88 msec
● Idle speed Rear window defogger switch: ON
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DD3

M
CAUTION:
EC-468
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
0 - 4V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
A1 L/W EDU drive No. 2

A2 Y/PU EDU drive No. 4
PBIB0387E
A3 PU Y EDU drive No. 3
A4 EDU drive No. 1 0 - 4V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0388E
A9 R (11 - 14V)
1 - 5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
A29 W/PU EDU injector check signal PBIB0391E
1 - 5V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0392E
D26 G
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DD4
DTC Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible cause)

P0201 ● Injector No.1 does not operate normally. ● Harness or connectors
EC-469
[YD]
P0202 ● Injector No.2 does not operate normally. (Injector circuit is open or shorted.)
P0203 ● Injector No.3 does not operate normally. ● Electronic drive unit
P0204 ● Injector No.4 does not operate normally. ● Fuel injector
EC-470
[YD]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DD5
WITH CONSULT-II A
EC
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at least 2
seconds.)
C
SEF817Y
EC-471
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DD6
TBWA0132E
EC-472
[YD]
EC
TBWA0133E
EC-473
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DD7
1. CHECK ECM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and EDU harness con- netor.
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals corre-
sponding to the malfunctioning cylinder. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
Terminals
DTC ECM EDU Cylinder
P0201 A4 4 No.1
P0202 A1 1 No.2
P0203 A3 3 No.3
P0204 A2 2 No.4

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK PBIB0407E
or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK EDU OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector of malfunctioning
cylinder.
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals corre-
sponding to the malfunctioning cylinder. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
Terminals
DTC EDU Fuel injector Cylinder
P0201 9 4 No.1
P0202 12 4 No.2
P0203 10 4 No.3
P0204 11 4 No.4

PBIB0409E
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
EC-474
[YD]
3. CHECK FUEL INJECOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
1. Check harness continuity fuel injector terminal 3 of malfunctioning cylinder and EDU terminal 13.
EC
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4. C
4. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR-I

D
OK or NG
E
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace fuel injector.
5. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR-II F
1. Remove two fuel injectors of malfunctioning cylinder and another cylinder.

2. Install fuel injectors to different cylinder. G
3. Reconnect ECM harness connector, EDU harness connector and fuel injector harness connector.
4. Erase DTC. Refer to EC-401, "HOW TO ERASE DTC" .
5. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H
6. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
7. Check DTC.
I
Same DTC is detected. >>Replace EDU.

Another DTC is detected. >>Replace fuel injector of malfunctioning cylinder.
No DTC is detected. >>GO TO 6. J

K
>> INSPECTION END L

Component Inspection EBS00DD8
FUEL INJECTOR
1. Disconnect fuel injector. M
2. Check continuity between terminals as shown in the figure.
3. If NG, replace fuel injector.
Removal and Installation EBS00DD9
FUEL INJECTOR
EC-475
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR
(TDC) [YD]
DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSISTION SENSOR (TDC) PFP:23731
Description EBS00DDA
The crankshaft position sensor (TDC) monitors engine speed by means of

signals from the sensing plate (with 23 protrusions) installed to the fly
wheel. The datum signal output is detected 15 signal and sent to the ECM.
The sensor signal is used for fuel injection control and fuel injection
timing control.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DDB

PBIB0368E
CKPS·RPM (TDC) ● Run engine and compare tachometer indication with the CONSULT-II Almost the same speed as the
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DDC
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA(DC Voltage and Pulse Sig-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR nal)
NO.
[Engine is running]
B20 L/R Crankshaft position sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor (TDC) ground
● Idle speed
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
PBIB0395E
Crankshaft position sen- 0 - 30V

B21 L/G sor (TDC)
[Engine is running]
PBIB0396E
EC-476
(TDC) [YD]
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DDD
A
P0335 ● An improper voltage signal from the sensor is sent to ● Harness or connectors
ECM during running and cranking. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) EC
● Crankshaft position sensor (TDC)
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DDE

C
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode D
with CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 1 second.
3. Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. E
H
SEF817Y
EC-477
(TDC) [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DDF
TBWA0123E
EC-478
(TDC) [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DDG
1. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
C
3. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (TDC) harness connector F

and ECM harness connector.
PBIB0385E
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal B20 and
crankshaft position sensor (TDC) terminal 1. Refer to Wiring G
Diagram.

H
or NG
OK >> GO TO 2. I
2. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
PBIB0416E
J
1. Check harness continuity between crankshaft position sensor (TDC) terminal 2 and ECM terminal B21. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
3. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (TDC).
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DDH
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR(TDC)
EC-479
(TDC) [YD]
EC-480
(TDC) [YD]
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (TDC) harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor.
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Resistance: 1,850 - 2,450  PBIB0419E
Removal and Installation EBS00DDI
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (TDC)

When installing crankshaft position sensor (TDC), tighten it with specific PBIB0417E
torque.
Tightening torque:
4.9 - 7.9 N·m (0.50 - 0.81 kg-m, 43 - 70 in-lb)
PBIB0416E
EC-481
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
[YD]
DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR PFP:23731
A
Description EBS00DDJ
The camshaft position sensor identifies a particular cylinder by means of

signals from the sensing plate (with five protrusions) installed to the EC
camshaft. The datum signal output is detected 90 signal and sent to the
ECM. The sensor signal is used for fuel injection control and fuel
injection timing control.
C
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DDK

E
PBIB0367E
CAUTION: F
TERMI- G
WIRE DATA(DC Voltage and Pulse Sig-
NAL ITEM CONDITION
COLOR nal)
NO.
[Engine is running] H
B18 R/G Camshaft position sensor ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
0 - 3V I
● Idle speed
PBIB0393E K
0 - 8V
B19 R/Y Camshaft position sensor
L
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm M
PBIB0394E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DDL

P0340 ● An improper voltage signal from the sensor is send to ● Harness or connectors
ECM during running and cranking. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Camshaft position sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DDM
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V.
EC-482
[YD]
WITH CONSULT-II
with CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 1 second.
SEF817Y
EC-483
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DDN
EC
TBWA0124E
EC-484
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DDO
1. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor harness connector and ECM

harness connector.
PBIB0385E
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal B18 and camshaft
position sensor terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
PBIB0381E
1. Check harness continuity between camshaft position sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal B19. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DDP
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

EC-485
[YD]
2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor harness connector.
3. Remove the sensor. A
EC
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure. E
Resistance: 1,850 - 2,450  PBIB0418E
Removal and Installation EBS00DDQ
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

I
Refer to EM-134, "VACUUM PUMP" . PBIB0417E
EC-486
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
(VSS) [YD]
DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (VSS) PFP:32702
Description EBS00DDR
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the 4WD/ABS control unit. The combination meter
then sends a signal to the ECM.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DDS
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINA ITEM CONDITION
L NO.
0 - 5V
[Engine is running]
● Lift up the vehicle
E21 L/B Vehicle speed sensor ● In 2nd gear position
● Vehicle speed is 30 km/h (19 MPH)
PBIB0386E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DDT

P0500 ● The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed ● Harness or connectors
sensor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
driven. ● Vehicle speed sensor
● An excessively high voltage from the sensor is send to ● Combination meter
ECM
● 4WD/ABS control unit
Overall Function Check EBS00DDU
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC might not
be confirmed.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Lift up the vehicle.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed sensor signal by oscilloscope under the fol-
lowing conditions.
● In 2nd gear position.
● Vehicle speed is 30km/h (19MPH)

The oscilloscope should indicate the almost same signal wave as
that shown in the “ECM Terminals and Reference Value”.
SEF864Y
EC-487
(VSS) [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DDV
LHD MODELS A
EC
TBWA0172E
EC-488
(VSS) [YD]
RHD MODELS
TBWA0173E
EC-489
(VSS) [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DDW
1. CHECK DTC WITH 4WD/ABS CONTROL UNIT
Check DTC with 4WD/ABS control unit. Refer EC

to BRC-32, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS" .
OK or NG
C
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Reform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2. CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION D
Make sure that speed meter functions properly.

OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 5.
3. CHECK ECM INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

F

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and combination meter harness connector. G
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal E21 and combination meter terminal 50 or 63. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
H
4. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG I
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 4.
J
K
● Harness for open and short between ECM and combination meter
L
5. CHECK SPEEDOMATER INPUT SIGNL FOR OPEN AND SHORT

M
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector and 4WD/ABS control unit harness connector.
3. Check continuity between combination meter terminal 52 or 42 and 4WD/ABS control unit harness connector.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-490
(VSS) [YD]

● Harness connectors M14, E106
● Harness for open and short between 4WD/ABS control unit and combination meter
7. CHECK SPEED METER
Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS (LHD MODELS)" or DI-21, "COMBINATION METERS (RHD MOD-
ELS)" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace combination meter.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-491
DTC P1107 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[YD]
DTC P1107 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:23710
A
Description EBS00DDX
The absolute pressure sensor is built into ECM. The sensor detects ambient
barometric pressure and sends the voltage signal to the microcomputer. EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DDY

E

P1107 ● An excessively high or low voltage from the abso- ● ECM
PBIB0378E F
lute pressure sensor (built-into ECM) is sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DDZ

G
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. H
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-485, "Diagnostic Procedure" . I
K
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DE0
L
1. INSPECTION START
SEF817Y
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. M
4. Perform EC-485, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" , again.
5. Is the DTC P1107 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
EC-492
DTC P1107 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR
[YD]
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-401, "NATS
3. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-398 .
>> INSPECTION END
EC-493
DTC P1180 FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR [YD]
DTC P1180 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR PFP:16700
A
Description EBS00DE1
Fuel temperature sensor is built in the fuel supply pump. The sensor detects the fuel temperature in the fuel supply pump
and calibrates the fuel injection amount change by fuel temperature. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DE2

C
FUEL TEMP SEN ● Engine: After warming up More than 40C (104F)
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DE3

D
CAUTION: E
TER- F
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running] Approximately 0 - 4.8V Output G

A12 PU Fuel temperature sensor voltage varies with fuel
● Warm-up condition temperature
[Engine is running] H
A23 B Sensor's ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DE4 I

P1180 ● An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors J
● Fuel temperature sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DE5

K
WITH CONSULT-II
L
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at
least 2 seconds.) M
SEF817Y
EC-494
SENSOR [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DE6
TBWA0116E
EC-495
SENSOR [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DE7
1. CHECK FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel temperature sensor harness connector.
C
4. Check voltage between fuel temperature sensor terminal 1 and F

engine ground.
PBIB0464E
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power H
in harness or connectors.
2. CHECK FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
J
1. Turn ignition switch “ON”. PBIB0420E
2. Check harness continuity between fuel temperature sensor terminal 2 and ground. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
M
Check harness for open or short to between ECM and fuel temperature sensor.

OK or NG
OK >> Replace fuel supply pump.
Removal and Installation EBS00DE8
FUEL SUPPLY PUMP

Refer to EM-141, "FUEL SUPPLY PUMP" .
EC-496
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
DTC P1216 EDU PFP:22710
Description EBS00DE9
PBIB0482E
The ECM sends the fuel injection signal to EDU (Electronic Drive Unit). Then the EDU sends ON signals to fuel
injectors to operate them.
The EDU monitors injector ground circuit and sends the feed back signal to the ECM.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DEA
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
0 - 4V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
A1 L/W EDU drive No. 2

A2 Y/PU EDU drive No. 4
PBIB0387E
A3 PU Y EDU drive No. 3
A4 EDU drive No. 1 0 - 4V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0388E
A9 R (11 - 14V)
1 - 5V
[Engine is running]
A29 W/PU EDU injector check signal ● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
EC-497
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
PBIB0391E
EC-498
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA A
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
1 - 5V
EC
[Engine is running]
C
PBIB0392E
[Ignition switch “OFF”] E
D26 G F
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DEB G

P1216 ● EDU feed back signal is not normal pattern. ● Harness or connectors H
(Injector drive circuit is open or shorted.)
● Electronic drive unit
● Fuel injectors I
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DEC
WITH CONSULT-II
J
K
(If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to “START” for at least 2
seconds.)
L
SEF817Y
EC-499
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DED
TBWA0118E
EC-500
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
EC
TBWA0119E
EC-501
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DEE
1. INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch ”START”.

2. Is any cylinder ignited?
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK EDU POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect EDU harness connector.
4. Check voltage between EDU terminal 6 and ground with CON-

SULT-II or tester.
PBIB0407E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

● Harness for open or short between EDU and ECM
● Harness for open or short between EDU ad ECM relay
4. CHECK EDU GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between EDU terminal 8 and ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-502
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]
5. CHECK ECM OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A
2. Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
EC
ECM terminal EDU terminal
A4 4
A3 3 C
A2 2
A1 1
D
Continuity should exist

E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
F
6. CHECK EDU OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1.
Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors. G
2.
Check harness continuity between the following terminals. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
H
EDU terminal Fuel injector terminal
9 4
10 4 I
11 4
12 4
J
3.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
K
OK or NG PBIB0409E
OK >> GO TO 7.
L
7. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 3 of each cylinder and EDU terminal 13. Refer to M
Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
EC-503
DTC P1216 EDU
[YD]

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and EDU harness connector.
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal A29 and EDU terminal 5. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.

OK or NG
OK >> Replace EDU.
Removal and Installation EBS00DEF
FUEL INJECTOR
Refer to EM-138, "INJECTION TUBE AND FUEL INJECTOR" .
EC-504
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM)
[YD]
DTC P1217 OVERHEAT (COOLING SYSTEM) PFP:00021
A
Description EBS00DEG
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Cooling fan
control Cooling fan relay
C
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, air conditioner ON
signal. The control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. D
OPERATION
H
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DEH

SEF421Z
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION I
When cooling fan is stopped. OFF
COOLING FAN When cooling fans operate at low speed. LOW

J
When cooling fans operate at high speed. HIGH
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DEI
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. K
CAUTION:
L
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE M
E2 LG Cooling fan relay (Low)
[Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is operating Approximately 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Cooling fan is not operating BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Cooling fan is operating at low speed
E7 LG/B Cooling fan relay (High)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0.1V
● Cooling fan is operating at high speed
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DEJ
This diagnosis continuously monitors the engine coolant temperature.

If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will rise.
EC-505
[YD]
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is indicated.
P1217 ● Cooling fan does not operate properly (Overheat). ● Harness or connectors
● Cooling fan system does not operate properly (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
(Overheat). ● Cooling fan
● Engine coolant was not added to the system using the ● Radiator hose
proper filling method. ● Radiator
● Radiator cap
● Water pump
● Thermostat
For more information, refer to EC-506, "Main 12 Causes of
Overheating" .
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant following the procedure in the MA-22,
"Changing Engine Coolant" . Also, replace the engine oil.
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-14, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check EBS00DEK
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be confirmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-
up pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below the
proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-500, "Diagnostic
Procedure" .
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer filled

the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-500, "Diagnostic
Procedure" . AEC640

SULT-II and make sure that cooling fans operate when touching
“HIGH” or “LOW”.
If NG, go to EC-500, "Diagnostic Procedure" .
SEF111X
EC-506
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DEL
EC
TBWA0107E
EC-507
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DEM
1. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION
With CONSULT-II

SULT-II.
PBIB0369E
4. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION
SEF646X
With CONSULT-II
SULT-II.
5. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at high speed. OK
or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
"PROCEDURE B" .)
SEF111X
EC-508
[YD]
3. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
A
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2 ,
EC
23psi) CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop. C
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4. D

F
Check the following for leak. SLC754A

● Hose G
● Radiator
● Water pump (Refer toCO-40, "WATER PUMP" .)
H
5. CHECK RADIATOR CAP I
Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief
pressure. J
Radiator cap relief pressure:
78 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 9 - 14 psi)
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace radiator cap. L
SLC755A
EC-509
[YD]
6. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature:
80 - 84 C (176 - 183 F) [standard]
Valve lift:
More than 10 mm/95 C (0.339 in/203 F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5C (9F) below valve opening tem-
perature. For details, refer to CO-42, "THERMOSTAT AND
WATER PIPING" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace thermostat.
7. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SLC343

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-506, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating" .
>> INSPECTION END

PROCEDURE A

2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 5, 7 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0422E
EC-510
[YD]
A
● 10A fuse EC
● 40A fusible links
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
C
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
3. CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

I
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 3 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cool-
ing fan motor-1 terminal 4 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
PBIB0479E
Continuity should exist. J

K
ing fan motor-2 terminal 4 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal E2 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-511
[YD]

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace cooling fan relay.
7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
>> INSPECTION END

PROCEDURE B

4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1, 3 and

PBIB0369E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
EC-512 PBIB0424E
[YD]
A
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fusible link EC

C
3. CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. D
H
ing fan relay-2 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7 and body ground.
PBIB0479E
I
5. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-3 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 2, cool- J
ing fan relay-3 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-2 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-3 terminal 7 and body ground.

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal E7 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay- 3
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-513
[YD]

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM
6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace cooling fan relays.
7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
>> INSPECTION END

Main 12 Causes of Overheating EBS00DEN
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Condition Reference page

OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See MA-14, "Engine
Coolant Mixture Ratio" .
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level in See MA-22, "Changing
reservoir tank and radiator Engine Coolant" .
filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 78 - 98 kPa (0.78 - 0.98 See MA-24, "CHECKING
bar, 0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 11 - RADIATOR CAP" .
14 psi)
ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See MA-25, "CHECKING

COOLING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS" .
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See CO-42, "THERMO-
lower radiator hoses STAT AND WATER PIP-
ING" .
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See Trouble Diagnosis for

DTC P1217, EC-449 .
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemi- Negative —
cal tester 4 Gas ana-
lyzer
EC-514
[YD]
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Condition Reference page
A
ON* 3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —
gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driv- See MA-22, "Changing
reservoir tank ing and idling Engine Coolant" . EC
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See MA-23, "REFILLING
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank ENGINE COOLANT" .
tor C
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See EM-176, "CYLIN-
gauge mum distortion (warping) DER HEAD" .
D
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See EM-191, "CYLIN-
tons walls or piston DER BLOCK" .
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes. E
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-26, "OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS" .
F
Component Inspection EBS00DEO
COOLING FAN RELAY-1, -2 AND -3

Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7 under the fol- G
lowing conditions.
Conditions Continuity H
Yes
minals 1 and 2
No current supply No I
COOLING FAN MOTOR-1 AND -2

Supply battery voltage between the following terminals and check
operation. K
SEF745U
Terminals
Speed L
(+) (–)
Low 1 4
Cooling fan motor-1 High 1, 2 3, 4
M
Low 1 4
Cooling fan motor-2 High 1, 2 3, 4
PBIB0423E
EC-515
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL
VALVE [YD]
DTC P1233 - P1234 SUCTION CONTROL VALVE PFP:16700
Description EBS00DEP
To control the amount of the fuel inhalation of the fuel supply pump, a suction control valve is built into the fuel supply
pump. When the amount of the fuel inhalation of fuel supply pump increases, the fuel supply pump raises the fuel
exhalation pressure. As a result, the fuel injection pressure is raised. When the load of the engine increases, the ECM
sends a signal to the suction control valve to raise the injection pressure.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DEQ

● No-load
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DER
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DAT (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO. A
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Suction control valve

E1 L power supply PBIB0399E
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0400E
0 - 12.5V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
E8 Y/G Suction control valve 1 signal PBIB0401E
0 - 12.5V
EC-516
VALVE [YD]
[Engine is running]
PBIB0402E
EC-517
VALVE [YD]
TERMI-
WIRE A
NAL ITEM CONDITION DAT (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO. A
0 - 12.5V
EC
[Engine is running]
C
● Idle speed
E16 G/W Suction control valve 2 signal PBIB0401E
0 - 12.5V E
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition F
G
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DES

P1233 ● Suction control valve 1 and/or 2 dose not operate ● Harness or connectors H
normally. (Fuel supply pump suction control valve circuit is open or
shorted.)
P1234 ● Suction control valve 1 I
● Suction control valve 2
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DET
WITH CONSULT-II J
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. K
least 2 seconds.)
L
SEF817Y
EC-518
VALVE [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DEU
TBWA0122E
EC-519
VALVE [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DEV

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and fuel supply pump harness
connectors.
C
3. Check continuity between ECM terminal E1 and fuel supply
pump terminals 1, 3. Refer
to Wiring Diagram.
D
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 2.
in harness or connectors. F
2. CHECK SUCTION CONTROL VALVE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT PBIB0464E
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. G

2. Check continuity between ECM terminal E8 and fuel supply pump terminal 2, ECM terminal E16 and fuel supply
pump terminal 4.
Refer to Wiring Diagram. H

3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
3. CHECK SUCTION CONTROL VALVE

K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace fuel supply pump. L

M
>> INSPECTION END
EC-520
VALVE [YD]
Component Inspection EBS00DEW
SUCTION CONTROL VALVE

1. Check continuity between fuel supply pump terminals 1 and 2, 3 and
4.
2. If NG, replace fuel supply pump.
Removal and Installation EBS00DEX
FUEL SUPPLY PUMP

Refer to EM-141, "FUEL SUPPLY PUMP" . PBIB0466E
EC-521
DTC P1301 - P1304 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT
RESISTOR [YD]
DTC P1301 - P1304 FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR PFP:16600
A
Description EBS00DEY
The fuel injector adjustment resistor is built into the fuel injector. The resistance is constant and individual. ECM
uses the individual resistance to determine the fuel injection pulse. EC
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DEZ
C
CAUTION:
D
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
E
[Engine is running]
A25 G/W Fuel injector's ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
F
B9 G/B
resistor No.2
Fuel injector adjustment 0.7 - 2.3V (0.2 - 4.8V) G
B10 Y/B
resistor No.4 (There is an individual differ-
Fuel injector adjustment [Ignition switch “ON”] ence in fuel injector adjust-
B11 R/B resistor No.3 ment resistor.)
H
B12 W/B
resistor No.1
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DF0 I

P1301 ● An excessively high or low voltage from fuel injector ● Harness or connectors J
No.1 adjustment resistor is sent to ECM (Injector adjustment resister circuit is open or shorted.)
● An excessively high or low voltage from fuel injector ● Fuel injector adjustment resistor
P1302
No.2 adjustment resistor is sent to ECM
K
● An excessively high or low voltage from fuel injector
P1303
● An excessively high or low voltage from fuel injector
P1304 L
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DF1
WITH CONSULT-II M
least 2 seconds.)
SEF817Y
EC-522
RESISTOR [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DF2
TBWA0128E
EC-523
RESISTOR [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DF3
1. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector of malfunctioning
cylinder.
C
F
4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 2 and ground with
PBIB0409E
Voltage: Approximately 5V G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
H
NG >> GO TO 2.

J
Check harness continuity for open and short between ECM and fuel injector.PBIB0414E
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
3. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR GROUND CIRCUIT

L
2. Check harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 1 and ECM terminal A25.

or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-524
RESISTOR [YD]
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DF4
FUEL INJECTOR ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR

1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
2. Check continuity between terminals as shown in the figure.
If NG, replace fuel injector.
Removal and Installation EBS00DF5
FUEL INJECTOR
EC-525
DTC P1305 FUEL LEAK
[YD]
DTC P1305
DTC FUEL LEAK
Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible cause) PFP:17520
A
On Board Diagnosis
P1305 Logic
The relation between the output signal to suction control valve and inputcontrol
Suction signal valve
from common rail fuel pressure sensor is not in normal ra
EBS00DF6
Fuel tube
Common rail
Fuel pressure relief valve
EC
C
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DF7
WITH CONSULT-II D
3. Start engine and run it for at least 2 seconds at idle speed. E
least 2 seconds.)
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-517, "Diagnostic Procedure" . F
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DF8

H
1. INSPECTION START
SEF817Y
I
1. Start engine.
2. Visually check the following for fuel leak.
– Fuel tube from fuel supply pump to common rail J
– Common rail
– Fuel tube from common rail to fuel injector
K
3. Also check for improper connection or pinches.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair malfunctioning part. L
2. CEHCK FUEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

M
Refer to EC-399, "Fuel Pressure Relief Valve" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Replace common rail.

OK or NG
OK >> Replace fuel supply pump.
Removal and Installation EBS00DF9
COMMON RAIL
Refer to EM-138, "INJECTION TUBE AND FUEL INJECTOR" .
EC-526
DTC P1305 FUEL LEAK
[YD]
FUEL SUPPLY PUMP
Refer to EM-141, "FUEL SUPPLY PUMP" .
EC-527
DTC P1510 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
SWITCH [YD]
DTC P1510 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH PFP:18002
A
Description EBS00DFA
The accelerator work unit is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal assembly. The accelerator pedal position
sensor 1, 2 and accelerator pedal released position switch are built into the accelerator work unit. The sensor detects the EC
accelerator pedal position and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM uses the signal to determine the amount of fuel to
be injected.
The accelerator pedal released position switch detects accelerator pedal released position signal and sends
this signal to the ECM. The ECM will then determine engine idle conditions. This signal is also used for diag- C
nosing the accelerator pedal position sensor.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DFB

J

Accelerator pedal: fully released 0.8 - 1.3V K
ACCEL POS SEN
PBIB0953E (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: fully depressed More than 3.5V
Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: fully released 0.3 - 1.8V

● L
OFF ACCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: slightly M
depressed
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DFC
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
A21 B position switch ground [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V

A22 LG [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 0V
sensor 1 ground
EC-528
SWITCH [YD]
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
sensor 2 ground
B15 W

B16 G

B23 GY/L [Ignition switch “ON”] Approximately 5V
D14 G/Y
Approximately 0V
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DFD

P1510 ● The relation between accelerator pedal position sensor ● Harness or connectors
1, 2 signals and accelerator pedal position switch (Accelerator pedal released position switch circuit is open
signal is not in the normal range during the specified or shorted.)
accelerator pedal positions. ● Accelerator pedal released position switch
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DFE
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Depress and release fully accelerator pedal slowly.
SEF817Y
EC-529
SWITCH [YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DFF
EC
TBWA0177E
EC-530
SWITCH [YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DFG
1. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4. Check voltage between accelerator work unit terminal 5 and

PBIB0379E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

● Harness for open or short between accelerator work unit and ECM
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between accelerator work unit terminal 4 and ECM terminal A21. Refer to Wir- ing
Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
EC-531
SWITCH [YD]
A
● Harness for open or short between ECM and accelerator work unit EC
C
5. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH
Refer to EC-523, "Component Inspection" . D

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6. E
6. REPLEACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly. F

G
>> INSPECTION END

H
>> INSPECTION END I
Component Inspection EBS00DFH
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION SWITCH

J
Check continuity between accelerator position switch terminals 4
and 5 under the following conditions.
Conditions Continuity K
Accelerator pedal fully released Should exist.
Accelerator pedal depressed Should not exist.
L
Removal and Installation EBS00DFI
ACCELERATOR WORK UNIT

Refer to ACC-2, "ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM" . PBIB0366E
EC-532
DTC P1606 ECM
[YD]
DTC P1606 ECM PFP:23710
Description EBS00DFJ
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and
output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DFK

PBIB0378E
P1606 ● ECM calculation function is malfunctioning. ● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DFL
WITH CONSULT-II
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DFM
1.
SEF817Y
INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
4. Perform EC-524, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" , again.
5. Is DTC P1606 displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
EC-533
DTC P1606 ECM
[YD]
2. REPLACE ECM
A
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-401,
"NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System)" . EC
3. Perform “Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-398, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position
Learning" .
C
>> INSPECTION END
EC-534
DTC P1621 ECM RELAY
[YD]
DTC P1621 ECM RELAY PFP:25230
ECM Terminals and Reference valve EBS00DFN
TER-
WIRE DATA
MINA ITEM CONDITION
L NO.
A9 R (11 - 14V)
D19 W/R (11 - 14V)
● For a few seconds after turning ignition switch Approximately 0V
D24 G “OFF”
D26 G ECM relay (self-shutoff) [Ignition switch “OFF”]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch “OFF”
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DFO

P1621 ● An irregular voltage signal from the ECM relay is ● Harness or connectors (ECM relay circuit is open or
sent to ECM. shorted.)
● ECM relay
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DFP
WITH CONSULT-II
“ON”.
SEF817Y
EC-535
DTC P1621 ECM RELAY
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DFQ
EC
TBWA0121E
EC-536
DTC P1621 ECM RELAY
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DFR
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

3. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 6 and ground with

PBIB0377E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

● 20A fuse
● Harness for open and short between ECM relay and battery

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals A8, A9 and ECM relay terminal 7. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-537
DTC P1621 ECM RELAY
[YD]
A
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals D24, D26 and ECM relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
Continuity should exist. EC

OK or NG C
OK >> GO TO 6.
5. CHECK ECM RELAY

D

OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDET

F

G
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DFS
H
ECM RELAY
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7. I
12V direct current supply between J
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
OFF No
3. If NG, replace ECM relay. K
PBIB0077E
M
EC-538
DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE
[YD]
DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE PFP:AYBGL
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00DFT
The ECM checks if battery voltage is within the tolerance range for the engine control system.
P1660 ● An abnormally high or low voltage from the battery is ● Incorrect jump starting
sent to ECM. ● Battery
● Alternator
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00DFU
With CONSULT-II
– Jumper cables are connected for jump starting.
– Battery or alternator has been replaced.
If the result is “Yes” for one item or more, skip the following steps and go to EC-530, "Diagnostic Proce- dure" .
2. Check that the positive battery terminal is connected to battery properly. If NG, reconnect it properly.
3. Check that the alternator functions properly. Refer to SC-12, "CHARGING SYSTEM" .
4. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
5. Wait one minute.
7. Start engine and wait one minute at idle.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DFV
1. INSPECTION START
Are jumper cables connected for the jump starting? Yes

or No
Yes >> GO TO 3.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK BATTERY AND ALTERNATOR
Check that the proper type of battery and alternator is installed. Refer
to SC-3, "BATTERY" , SC-12, "CHARGING SYSTEM" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace with a proper one.
EC-539
DTC P1660 BATTERY VOLTAGE
[YD]
3. CHECK JUMPER CABLES INSTALLATION
A
Check that the jumper cables are connected in the correct sequence.
EC
OK or NG E
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG
SEF439Z >> Reconnect jumper cables properly.
4. CHECK BATTERY FOR BOOSTER

F
Check that the battery for the booster is a 12V battery.

G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Change the vehicle for booster. H
5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
Perform EC-530, "DTC Confirmation Procedure" , again. I

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace ECM. J
6. CHECK ELECTRICAL PARTS DAMAGE

K
Check the following for damage.
● Wiring harness and harness connectors for burn
● Fuses for short
L
OK or NG
NG >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. M
EC-540
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:25230
Description EBS00DFW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) Engine speed Glow lamp
Glow control Glow relay
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Glow plugs
When engine coolant temperature is more than approximately 80C (176F), the glow relay turns off. When
coolant temperature is lower than approximately 80C (176F):
● Ignition switch ON
After ignition switch has turned to ON, the glow relay turns ON for a certain period of time in relation to engine
coolant temperature, allowing current to flow through glow plug.
● Cranking
The glow relay turns ON, allowing current to flow through glow plug.
● Starting
After engine has started, current continues to flow through glow plug (after-glow mode) for a certain period in
relation to engine coolant temperature.
The glow indicator lamp turns ON for a certain period of time in relation to engine coolant temperature at the time
glow relay is turned ON.
Glow Plug
The glow plug is provided with a ceramic heating element to obtain a
high-temperature resistance. It glows in response to a signal sent from the
ECM, allowing current to flow through the glow plug via the glow relay.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DFX
CAUTION: SEF376Y
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 1.0V
● Glow lamp is “ON”
D2 OR Glow lamp
● Glow lamp is “OFF” (11 - 14V)
E9 W/R Glow relay Refer to EC-532, "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION"
EC-541
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DFY
EC
TBWA0108E
EC-542
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DFZ
1. INSPECTION START
Check fuel level, fuel supplying system, starter motor, etc. OK

or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Correct.
2. CHECK INSTALLATION
Check that glow plug nut and all glow plug connecting plate nuts are installed
properly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Install properly.
3. CHECK GLOW INDICATOR LAMP
OPERATION With CONSULT-II SEF392YA

2. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Confirm that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates below 80C (176F). If
it indicates above 80C (176F), cool down engine.
“ON”.
5. Make sure that glow indicator lamp is turned “ON” for 1.5 seconds
or more after turning ignition switch “ON”, and then glow indicator
lamp turned “OFF”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.
SEF013Y
EC-543
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
4. CHECK GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL FUNCTION
A
1. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Confirm that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates approximately 25C EC
(77F). If NG, cool down engine.
4. Set voltmeter probe between glow plug and engine body. C
6. Check the voltage between glow plug and engine body under E
the following conditions.
SEF013Y
Conditions Voltage
F
For 20 seconds after turning ignition
Battery voltage
switch “ON”
More than 20 seconds after turning igni-
Approx. 0V G
tion switch “ON”
OK or NG
H
NG >> GO TO 10.
5. CHECK GLOW INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

PBIB0425E
I
2. Disconnect combination meter harness connector M46.
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”. J
4. Check voltage between combination meter terminal 46 or 59 and
K
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7. L
NG >> GO TO 6.

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between combination meter and fuse
EC-544
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
7. CHECK GLOW INDICATOR LAMP OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal D2 and combination meter terminal 65 or 55. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.

● Harness for open or short between combination meter and ECM
Check combination meter and glow indicator lamp. Refer to DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS (LHD MODELS)" or
DI-21, "COMBINATION METERS (RHD MODELS)" and DI-38, "WARNING LAMPS" .
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Repair or replace combination meter or glow indicator lamp.
10. CHECK GLOW RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect glow relay.
3. Check voltage between glow relay terminals 1, 3 and ground with

PBIB0373E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
EC-545 PBIB0427E
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
A
● 60A fusible link
● Harness for open or short between glow relay and battery EC

C
12. CHECK GLOW RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. D

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal E9 and glow relay terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14. F
NG >> GO TO 13.

G
H
● Harness for open or short between glow relay and ECM
I
14. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY BETWEEN GLOW RELAY AND GLOW PLUG FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
J
1. Disconnect glow plug harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between glow relay terminal 5 and glow plug harness connector. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
K

OK or NG L
OK >> GO TO 15.
M
15. CHECK GLOW RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG >> Replace glow relay.
16. CHECK GLOW PLUG

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Replace glow plug.
EC-546
GLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DG0
GLOW RELAY
Check continuity between glow relay terminals 3 and 5 under the following
conditions.
Yes
minals 1 and 2
PBIB0428E
GLOW PLUG
1. Remove glow plug connecting plate.
2. Check glow plug resistance.
Resistance: Approximately 0.8  [at 25C
(77F)] NOTE:
● Do not bump glow plug heating element. If it is bumped,
replace glow plug with a new one.
● If glow plug is dropped from a height of 10 cm (3.94 in)
or higher, replace with a new one.
● If glow plug installation hole is contaminated with car-
bon, remove it with a reamer or suitable tool.
● Hand-tighten glow plug by turning it two or three times,
then tighten using a tool to specified torque.
: 17.7 - 22.5 N-m (1.8 - 2.3 kg-m, 13 - 16 ft-lb)

PBIB0429E
Removal and Installation EBS00DG1
GLOW PLUG
Refer to EM-133, "GLOW PLUG" .
EC-547
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM
[YD]
EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:14710
A
Description EBS00DG2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator EC
C
EGR volume con- EGR volume control
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position trol valve
D
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
E
This system controls flow rate of EGR led from exhaust manifold to intake manifold. The opening of the EGR
by-pass passage in the EGR volume control valve changes to control the flow rate. A built-in step motor moves the valve
in steps corresponding to the ECM output pulses. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The
optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine con- F
ditions.
The EGR volume control valve remains close under the following conditions.
● Engine stopped G
● Engine starting
● Low engine coolant temperature
● Excessively high engine coolant temperature H
● High engine speed

● Wide open throttle
I
EGR Volume Control Valve M
ThePBIB0954E
EGR volume control valve uses a step motor to control the flow rate
of EGR from exhaust manifold. This motor has four winding phases. It
operates according to the output pulse signal of the ECM. Two windings
are turned ON and OFF in sequence. Each time an ON pulse is issued, the
valve opens or closes, changing the flow rate. When no change in the flow
rate is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain voltage
signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular opening.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DG3

SEF411Y
EC-548
[YD]
rpm
● No-load
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DG4
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE DATA
NAL ITEM CONDITION
NO.
A9 R (11 - 14V)
0.1 - 14V
B3 W
[Engine is running] (Voltage signals of each ECM ter-
B4 OR/B
EGR volume control valve Warm-up condition minals differ according to the con-
B5 W/L ●
trol position of EGR volume control
B6 GY ● Idle speed valve.)
D26 G ECM relay (self-shutoff)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch “OFF”
EC-549
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DG5
EC
TBWA0109E
EC-550
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DG6
1. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL SYSTEM OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Set the oscilloscope probe between ECM terminals B3, B4, B5, B6 and ground.
4. Check the oscilloscope screen when revving engine up to 3,200 rpm and return to idle.
PBIB0430E
The pulse signal as shown in the figure should appear.

OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
4. Check voltage between EGR volume control valve terminals 2, 5 and

PBIB0380E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-551 PBIB0431E
[YD]
3. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
A
3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 5 and EGR EC
volume control valve terminals 2, 5. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.
C
OK or NG D
OK >> GO TO 4.
in harness or connectors. E
4. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with CON- F
PBIB0377E
SULT-II or tester.
G
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
H
PBIB0432E
J
● 10A fuse K
● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
6. CHECK ECM RELAY

M
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
EC-552
[YD]
7. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals and EGR volume control valve terminals as follows. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
ECM terminal EGR volume control valve terminal

B3 4
B4 3
B5 6
B6 1

or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EGR volume control valve.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DG7
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

With CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
PBIB0380E
EC-553
[YD]
2. Check resistance between the following terminals.
● terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3 A
● terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6
Temperature C (F) Resistance  EC

20 (68) 13 - 17
If NG, replace EGR volume control valve.

If OK, go to next step. C
3. Reconnect EGR volume control valve harness connector.
4. Remove EGR volume control valve from cylinder head. D
(The EGR volume control valve harness connector should
remain connected.)
E
6. Perform “EGR VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II. Check that EGR volume control H
valve shaft moves smoothly forward and backward according to the valve opening.
SEF605Y
J
If NG, replace the EGR volume control valve. L

Removal and Installation EBS00DG8
EGR VOLUME CONTROL VALVE

SEF819Y
Refer to EM-122, "EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND TURBOCHARGER" . M
EC-554
BRAKE SWITCH
[YD]
BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25230
Description EBS00DG9
The stop lamp switch is installed to brake pedal bracket. The switch senses
brake pedal position and sends an ON-OFF signal to the ECM. The ECM
uses the signal to control the fuel injection control system.
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DGA
CAUTION: PBIB0379E
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released
D25 R/G Stop lamp switch
● Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V)
EC-555
BRAKE SWITCH
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DGB
FOR SOUTH AFRICA A
EC
TBWA0187E
EC-556
BRAKE SWITCH
[YD]
EXCEPT FOR SOUTH AFRICA
TBWA0174E
EC-557
BRAKE SWITCH
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DGC

EC
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “BRAKE SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON- C
SULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW” signal under the following conditions.
D
Conditions BRAKE SW
Brake pedal released OFF
Brake pedal slightly depressed ON E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. F
2. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRUIT

G
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground K

PBIB0379E
L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3. M
3. DETECT MALFUNCTION PART
Check the following PBIB0117E
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
EC-558
BRAKE SWITCH
[YD]

3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal D25 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
Check the following

● Joint connector-2 M49 (Models except for South Africa)
● Joint connector-3 M72 (Models for South Africa)
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and ECM

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DGD
STOP LAMP SWITCH

Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.
PBIB0118E
EC-559
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH
[YD]
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH PFP:31918
A
Description EBS00DGE
When the gear position is in “Neutral”, neutral position is “ON”. ECM detects the position because the continuity of
the line (the “ON” signal) exists. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DGF

C
Shift lever: Neutral ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON Except above OFF D
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DGG
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground. E
CAUTION:
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground. F
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO. G
● Gear position is “Neutral” Approximately 0V
Park/Neutral position switch
E13 G/OR
[Ignition switch “ON”] H
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)
EC-560
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DGH
TBWA0113E
EC-561
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DGI

EC
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON- C
SULT-II.
3. Check “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
D
Shift lever position P/N POSI SW
Neutral position ON
Except the above position OFF E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2. F
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

G
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”. SEF212Y
2. Disconnect park/neutral position (PNP) switch harness connector.

H
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and
body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. J
nectors.
K
3. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
L
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal E13 and PNP switchPBIB0370E
terminal 1. Refer to Wiring Dia-
gram.
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Refer to MT-12, "POSITION SWITCH" .

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace park/neutral position switch.
EC-562
[YD]
>> INSPECTION END
EC-563
START SIGNAL
[YD]
START SIGNAL PFP:48750
A
Wiring Diagram EBS00DGJ
EC
TBWA0110E
EC-564
START SIGNAL
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DGK
1. CHECK START SIGNAL OVERALL FUNCTION
With CONSULT-II
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
Condition “START SIGNAL”

Ignition switch “ON” OFF
Ignition switch “START” ON
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK START SIGNAL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and ignition switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal D27 and ignition switch terminal 6. Refer to Wiring Dia- gram.

or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

● 10A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connectors M1, E102
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch
>> INSPECTION END
EC-565
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
[YD]
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH PFP:49761
A
Component Description EBS00DGL
The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power steering
high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. EC
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The ECM
adjusts the fuel injector pulse width to increase the idle speed
and adjust for the increased load.
C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00DGM E

PBIB0375E
OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL ● Engine: After warming up, idle the (Forward direction)
engine Steering wheel is turned. ON G
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00DGN
Specification data are reference values, and are measured between each terminal and ground. H
CAUTION:
I TER-
WIRE
COLOR
L NO.
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V J
● Steering wheel is being turned
Power steering oil pressure
E12 P/B
switch [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Steering wheel is not being turned (11 - 14V)
K
EC-566
[YD]
Wiring Diagram EBS00DGO
TBWA0115E
EC-567
[YD]
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00DGP

EC
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check “PW/ST SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON- C
Conditions PW/ST SIGNAL

D
Steering in neutral position OFF
Steering is turned ON
OK or NG E
NG >> GO TO 2.
F
2. CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
G
2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector.

H
3. Check harness continuity between power steering oil pressure
switch terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. J
nectors.
K
3. CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND
SHORT
PBIB0375E L
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal E12 and power steering oil pressure switch terminal 1. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
M
or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace power steering oil pressure switch.
EC-568
[YD]
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00DGQ

1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector and then start engine.
2. Check continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminal
1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Steering wheel is being fully turned. Yes
Steering wheel is not being turned. No
Removal and Installation EBS00DGR

Refer to PS-33, "HYDRAULIC LINE" . PBIB0435E
EC-569
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
[YD]
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL PFP:27500
A
Wiring Diagram EBS00DGS
EC
TBWA0111E
EC-570
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[YD]
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
Wiring Diagram (For South Africa) EBS00G7R
TBWA0188E
EC-571
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
[YD]
Wiring Diagram (Except for South Africa) EBS00G7S
EC
TBWA0176E
EC-572
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) [YD]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00100
General Specifications EBS00DGU
Engine YD22DDTi
Idle speed 725  25 rpm
Maximum engine speed 4,900 rpm
Mass Air Flow Sensor EBS00DGV
Ignition switch "ON" (Engine stopped.) Approx. 1.0V

Idle (Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.) 1.0 - 2.5V
2,000 rpm (Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.)
2.1 - 2.7V
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EBS00DGW

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Common Rail Fuel Pressure Sensor EBS00DGX
Supply voltage Approximately 5V

Idle (Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.) 1.6 - 1.8V
2,000 rpm (Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature.)
1.8 - 2.0V
Crankshaft Position Sensor (TDC) EBS00DGY
Resistance [at 20C (68F)]  1,850 - 2,450
Camshaft Position Sensor EBS00DGZ
Resistance [at 20C (68F)]  1,850 - 2,450
Glow Plug EBS00DH0
Resistance [at 25C (77F)]  Approximately 0.8
Egr Volume Control Valve EBS00DH1
Resistance [at 25C (77F)]  13 - 17
EC-573

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Engine Control System: Section

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B ENGINE

APP SEN 1/CIRC*5 P0228 0228 EC-161 D

APP SEN 2/CIRC*5 P1228 1228 EC-267

ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 EC-295

ECT SEN/CIRCUIT* 5 P0117 0117 EC-114 J

ECT SEN/CIRCUIT*5 P0118 0118 EC-114

ETC FUNCTION/CIRC*5 P1122 1122 EC-226

ETC MOT PWR*5 P1124 1124 EC-233

ETC MOT PWR* 5 P1126 1126 EC-233 M

FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1*2 P0171 0171 EC-131

FUEL SYS-RICH-B1*2 P0172 0172 EC-137

HO2S1 (B1)*2 P0132 0132 EC-119

HO2S1 (B1)*2 P0134 0134 EC-125

HO2S1 HTR (B1)*2 P0031 0031 EC-98

HO2S1 HTR (B1)*2 P0032 0032 EC-98

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT* 5 P0102 0102 EC-103

MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*5 P0103 0103 EC-103

SENSOR POWER/CIRC* 5 P1229 1229 EC-273

TP SEN 1/CIRC*5 P0222 0222 EC-149

TP SEN 1/CIRC*5 P0223 0223 EC-149

TP SEN 2/CIRC*5 P1223 1223 EC-257

TP SEN 2/CIRC*5 P1224 1224 EC-257

TP SENSOR*5 P0221 0221 EC-143

DTC No. Index EBS00FWN

P0032 0032 HO2S1 HTR (B1)*2 EC-98

P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*5 EC-103

P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT*5 EC-103

P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1)*2 EC-119 C

P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1*2 EC-131

P0221 0221 TP SENSOR*5 EC-143

P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC*5 EC-149

P0226 0226 APP SENSOR*5 EC-155 F

P0228 0228 APP SEN 1/CIRC*5 EC-161

P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR*5 EC-233

P1128 1128 ETC MOT*5 EC-238

P1224 1224 TP SEN 2/CIRC*5 EC-257

P1228 1228 APP SEN 2/CIRC*5 EC-267

P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC*5 EC-273

On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T EBS00FWP

● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors with 22 mm (0.87 in)

KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

Tool name Description

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant temperature sensor

Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System EBS00FWX

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART A

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning EBS00FX4